Download Subtitles for How to Create a FREE eCommerce Website
How to Create a FREE eCommerce Website with WordPress ~ ONLINE STORE ~ WooCommerce 2026
Jim Fahad Digital
SRT - Most compatible format for video players (VLC, media players, video editors)
VTT - Web Video Text Tracks for HTML5 video and browsers
TXT - Plain text with timestamps for easy reading and editing
Scroll to view all subtitles
In this tutorial, I'll show you how to
create a fully professional and amazing
looking e-commerce website for
completely free. We'll be using the best
resources to build this online shop.
We'll use a free theme, a free page
builder, and all free plugins to create
everything step by step. To create this
online shop, we have taken inspiration
and features from some of the world's
top e-commerce websites like Amazon,
AliExpress, Walmart, Flipkart, and many
more. Even though we're using only free
tools, your website will still have all
the core and necessary features of a
modern professional online store. You'll
be able to sell any type of product.
Physical products, digital or
downloadable products, products with
different colors and sizes,
even affiliate products that redirect to
other websites. Basically, you can think
of it like you can sell it with this
website. We'll also cover some really
advanced e-commerce techniques. Your
customers will be able to add products
to the cart very easily. Then their
shipping cost and tax rate will be
calculated automatically based on their
location. On the checkout page, people
will be able to pay using different
payment methods like PayPal, credit or
debit cards and even your local payment
gateways depending on your country. So
customers don't need to visit any third
party website. They can complete the
entire purchase directly on your store
as we're handling payments. So, our
website must be 100% secure. Don't
worry, I'll show you how to secure your
site properly by adding an SSL
certificate. And I'll even make a real
purchase so you can see everything
working perfectly from start to finish.
And we're still not done. Whenever
anyone buys a product, you'll receive an
instant order notification on your phone
or email. This website will include some
powerful extra features that many
premium themes and plugins don't give
you out of the box like wish list
feature order autotracking style
experience variation swatches for colors
sizes and more. On the top of that we'll
design this beautiful online shop from
scratch without using any readymade
templates. The good news is you don't
need to write a single line of code.
Everything will be done just using drag
and drop. So even if you have never
created a website before, this tutorial
will still be perfect for you. We'll
make this entire e-commerce website 100%
responsive for tablets and mobile
devices. We'll also set it up in a way
that's SEOfriendly so your store has a
better chance to rank higher in Google
search results. This video will be your
one-stop e-commerce solution. You'll be
able to create any type of online store
for yourself or for your clients. So,
before we start, please pause the video
for a second, give this video a big
thumbs up, and comment down below how
excited you are for this master class.
It really means a lot and helps us to
keep making these long in-depth free
tutorials for you. Now, before we create
everything step by step from scratch,
let me quickly show you what we will be
building in this tutorial. First, we'll
add a professional header. On the left
side, we'll place your website or brand
logo. And on the right, we'll create
navigation menus that let visitors move
through your website easily. We'll also
add a search bar so people can search
for any products by name or category.
Then we'll be adding user or account
button so customers can log in or
register, manage their orders,
addresses, and account details. And of
course, we'll have a cart button, the
heart of any e-commerce website with a
mini cart where people can quickly
review their products, update
quantities, go to the full cart page, or
proceed directly to checkout.
Next, we'll design a beautiful hero
banner that instantly grabb attention
with simple layout and clean color
combinations will give your shop a
modern aesthetic vibe. Right after that,
we'll create category cards like people
can go to men or women categories by
clicking on them. Then, we'll add a
product section to showcase some of your
bestselling products where people can
add items to their cart directly.
Then we'll add testimonials to show what
people think about your store, building
extra trust and credibility.
After that, we'll highlight some
featured products with a stylish layout
that looks like a premium theme. Right
after that, we'll create a feature
section to highlight your store's key
strengths like worldwide delivery, live
support, special discount, and more.
Then we'll nicely show some of our blog
posts. From here, people can click on
these and read the full blog. And
finally, we'll design a clean and
flexible footer where everything will be
easily changeable. Text, images, links,
and a nice copyright area that you can
fully control from the dashboard. Then,
we'll create a professional shop page
where visitors can see all the products
in one place. They'll be able to add
products to the cart directly or add
them to wish list by clicking on hard
icon. On the sidebar, we'll add powerful
widgets like product search, price
filter, recently viewed products,
categories, and tag filters so people
can quickly find exactly what they're
looking for. When someone clicks on a
product, they'll be taken to a full
product details page. We'll set up this
properly with product name and
description, main product image,
multiple gallery images, product
variation like size and colors, a stock
progress bar, quantity selector and add
to cart button, full description,
additional information and product
reviews section and related products at
the bottom. So your product page will
feel complete, trustworthy and
conversion focused. We'll build a
detailed cart page where customers can
review their products, remove items,
update quantity, and see the exact costs
on the right side. Also, I'll show you
how to set up coupon codes so customers
can apply that to have discounts. Then,
we'll customize the checkout page where
customers will enter their contact
information, fill in their billing
details, choose a payment methods. will
set up different payment methods like
cash on delivery, online payments like
card, PayPal, Stripe, and other options.
See all order details including taxes,
discounts, and totals. And finally,
place their order. Then they'll see a
clear thank you page. We'll also create
a blog page where you can publish
articles for SEO and authority building.
We'll design the blog listing and single
blog page.
Then we'll build a contact page very
easily with an invaded Google map for
your business location. Then clear
contact information like phone number,
email, and address and fully working
contact form so customers can send
messages. Can you believe we'll create
all of these just by using free plugins
and free page builder? And I'll show you
everything step by step. Now let me
introduce myself. My name is Ton Nishad.
I'm a professional web developer and
even in the past I have completed many
freelance WordPress projects for my
clients. So inside this tutorial you're
learning the same methods and techniques
that we use in real client projects. I'm
really excited about this. Please give
this video a big thumbs up. That's the
only thing I ask from you. Other than
that, this video is completely free. And
if you like this video, you can always
find it later easily from YouTube's like
videos section. All right, we'll be
building our beautiful e-commerce
website in easy four steps. First, I'll
show you how to get your domain name and
web hosting. I'll also provide you with
a 78% discount link so you can save a
big amount on hosting. Then, we'll
install WordPress. Next, we'll install
and set up U-commerce plug-in. Finally,
we'll start designing our amazing online
shop. I'll be also adding timestamp in
the description so you can always jump
directly to the exact part you need.
Let's now start with the step number one
which is to get your domain name and web
hosting.
So first of all, what is a domain name?
Domain name is basically your website
address like Facebook has facebook.com,
Amazon has Amazon.com, we have
jimfadigital.com.
Similarly, for your website, you need an
address that will be your
websiteename.com.
And what is web hosting? Web hosting is
the storage space for your website. All
the images, all the texts you'll have in
your website all will be stored on your
own web hosting. As you are owning your
own web hosting, so there won't be any
limitation. You can run ads, you can
upload any text or images, you can
upload any themes or plugins you want.
you are the in charge of your own
website. Now, how to get your own web
hosting with a free domain name. So,
first just click on this very first link
in the description below this video or
you can just go to jimfadigital.com/best
host and this will take you to a special
discounted Hostinger page. But why
Hostinger? In my opinion, Hostinger is
the most affordable and also the fastest
web hosting provider. are available.
Just have a look into their trust pilot
reviews. People are super happy with
their hosting speed, affordable pricing
and customer support. Now, from here,
you can change the language if you want.
Maybe you speak Spanish, Portuguese or
Hindi. You can select your language from
here. One thing I also want to say is
that this page changes quite often. In
fact, they probably change it once a
month. So, if the banner or interface
looks different, don't worry, don't
panic. This happens quite often. It's
the same website. Let's scroll down a
bit. You'll find all the different
plans. By the way, we can see four plans
here, but sometimes you may see three
plans here. Just don't worry because you
can create your website with any of
these plans. But as you are starting
out, I recommend taking this premium or
business plan. With both of these plans,
you can create up to 100 websites. For
example, today you're creating a
portfolio website. Tomorrow you want to
create a business website. and next week
you want to create an e-commerce
website. So you don't need to purchase
hosting each time you can create all the
websites within this same web hosting
plan. So here with the premium plan
you'll get 100 GB of storage. With the
business plan you'll get 200 GB of
storage and with any of these plans
you'll get all the features like
unlimited free SSL. So all of your
websites would be encrypted and super
secure, unlimited bandwidth. So there
won't be any limit how many website
visitors you'll have. You can create
hundreds of professional email addresses
like info at the rateyousite.com
or admin at the rateyousite.com
like really professional email addresses
like these free automatic website
migrations. So if you want to move your
existing website from another hosting
provider to Hostinger, just contact
Hostinger support. They'll transfer it
on behalf of you for free. Then free
domain. Yes, like I said, you'll get a
domain name for free. And that's not
all. You'll also get tons of WordPress
features like one-click WordPress
installations, free one-click Google
integrations. It will help your website
monetize with Google AdSense and
significantly improve its SEO. They have
added awesome AI features as well. So,
you can create website contents using
Hostinger AI very easily. Now, let's
talk about security. Personally, I'm
very serious about website security and
Hostinger just nailed it with all of
these features like cloudfare protected
name servers, malware scanners and all
these. I've had very bad experiences
with other web hosting providers. We
have so many malware attacks and we had
to pay the hosting providers
additionally to use their other security
tools. But here in the hostinger, you're
getting all of these security tools for
free. Now, let's select a plan. And like
I said, you can take any of these plans
based on your needs. If you are just
starting out and on a budget, the
premium plan is a great option. Also,
you can always upgrade later. However,
if you ask me, I'd recommend the
business plan. Here's why. NVME storage.
SSDs are great, but NVMemes are
incredibly fast. Free Cydian. This
feature can make your website load up to
40% faster. Daily backups. This is my
favorite feature of the business plan.
This ensures your data is safe and
secure every day. Okay. So, let's click
here on choose plan.
All right. First, you can select the
hosting period.
48 months, which is 4 years, then 24
months, 12 months, and 1 month. I don't
recommend the one month plan since it
cost around $14 per month, which is way
too expensive. Instead, you can go for
12 months, 24 months, or 48 months. If
you ask me, the 48-month plan is the
best deal. For the first four years, you
only pay $3.49 per month, saving you
over $500. After that 4 years, the
renewal rate is just $8.99 per month.
Still very affordable for a hosting up
to 100 websites. If you prefer starting
smaller, you can choose the 12 months
plan which costs 3.99 per month for the
first year. After that, it renews at
13.99.
But remember, the longer the initial
term, the bigger the discount you will
get when you renewing. If you can afford
it, I highly recommend choosing this
48-month plan. It gives you the most
savings and locks in the lowest rate for
4 years. But wait, there is more. You
can click on have a coupon code and
enter my special code which is JFD10.
Once you apply it,
you'll get a 78% discount. As we have
applied the coupon code, if we take a
look at here, the 48 months plan drops
to 3.14 per month and the 12 months plan
becomes 3.59 per month. Can you believe
we're getting super fast web hosting
with a free domain name for an entire
year for just $43? What an amazing deal,
right? For this tutorial, I'm selecting
the 12 months plan. So, let's click
continue.
Now, let's quickly create a hostinger
account. From here, either you can
continue with Google or you can just use
your email address. So, I'm going to use
mine.
And make sure you use your vest email
address because later all the
verification code will be sent to this
email. Now let's put a really strong
password. All right. Now let's click
continue.
All right. After successfully signing
in, now we're here. You can fill up all
these informations like your name,
country, and then details and then click
continue. Now you see you can pay using
credit card, PayPal, Google pay or even
you can pay using cryptocurrency. Also
you may see more different local payment
options based on your country. So here
I'm putting my card information
and then just click on submit payment.
Now after successfully completing the
payment you may see some onboarding like
this but for some reason if you don't
see this or accidentally your tab is
deleted during the payment process you
can just go to hostinger.com
then click on login
and you'll be inside your Hostinger's
control panel and now all you got to do
is go to our email inbox and you'll see
an email from Hostinger says verify your
email address. Just open it and click
verify email.
Now the email will be verified and you
will be again inside the control panel.
From here click on this continue
creating or migrating a website. Click
on this continue button
and again we'll be on the same
onboarding we have started with. So from
here I'm just going to skip the surveys.
Just click skip.
And here it says do you want to create
or migrate a website? So as we are
creating a website, I'm going to check
this one. Create a website. Now just
click next.
So this is the option to create a
WordPress website. So make sure you
select the WordPress from here instead
of this Hostinger website builder and
click next.
And here's the login details for your
WordPress account. First of all, you can
change the language. Then you can change
the email address for the WordPress
account and also the password. So, I'm
going to leave this email address here.
And I'm going to enter a really strong
password.
All right. Now, let's click next. And
here it says, what type of website do
you want to build? So, instead of
choosing anything from here, I'm just
going to click on this create blank
site.
And here's the exciting part. We get a
free domain name from Hostinger. We can
claim a free domain name from here. So,
here we can search for any domain name
available. You can choose any domain
name that fits your vision or business.
Like you can just type your business.com
or your name.com. And here you can check
if this domain name is available or not.
All right. So I'm just going to search a
domain name for me.
I just typed it and we can see this is
available with the com extension. You
can choose any extension like nme.net.
I'm going to choose the.com extension
because it looks more professional and
legit. Okay, just click on here. And
after selecting it, just click next. And
here we have to register our domain name
real quick. So from here, just click on
this next step. And of course, make sure
this is your own country. All right,
next step.
And it says your domain name will be
registered using these details. So make
sure every information is correct. So
from here I'm selecting my division
Dhaka
and also the city and address.
Then I'm going to put my zip code. I'm
going to type in my phone number and
finish registration.
And you'll see an onboarding like this.
It says where is your targeted audience
located. You can select any country from
here. I'm just going to select United
States, Arizona. And now click next.
Now it says it's installing the
WordPress. This loading can take up to
one or two minutes. And now it says it's
ready to go. It's time to build your
online success. And here, let's hold up
for a moment because it's redirecting us
into the WordPress. All right. So this
is our WordPress dashboard. And by the
way, for some reason it did not redirect
you here. You can always just go to your
Hostinger control panel, then go to the
websites. And now inside the control
panel we have to enable some settings.
It seems overwhelming but it's too easy.
We just have to enable one or two
settings. So from here just click on
this dashboard.
Then click on this WordPress overview
and just make sure you have enabled this
force https. After enabling this click
on this WordPress admin and this is
again redirecting us into the WordPress.
All right. So finally we are at our
WordPress admin panel also known as the
dashboard. From here I'll make you
familiar with everything that you need
to build an e-commerce website like from
the posts to media pages, comment
appearance, plugins and more. But before
that let's clean up our dashboard a bit
because currently this is looking a bit
messy. So we can just close this welcome
popup then close all of these
unnecessary widgets or you can just
click on this screen options and
deselect everything one by one like
this.
and the screen will be clean. But there
is more stuff to clean up. Click on this
plugins
and you'll see a bunch of plugins
installed here by default. So if you're
new to the WordPress, doesn't matter
what plug-in you have here, just select
all of them like this.
Then from the bulk actions, select
deactivate. Now click apply
and all the plugins will be deactivated.
Now select all the plugins again. And
this time from the bulk actions select
the delete and apply and click okay.
And all the plugins will be just
deleted. All right. Now let's go ahead
and do some basic settings like changing
your username and password. So just
hover over the users and click on
profile. So here first of all we can see
admin color scheme. with it. We can
actually change the whole color scheme
of our dashboard. But this doesn't
matter that much because only we can see
this as a admin. So I'm just going to
keep it default. Okay. Now scroll down
and you'll find the language option.
From the language you can choose any
preferred language. There is so many
options here but I'm going to keep it
site default. Now let's scroll down. You
can set your first name,
last name, then your nickname
and here on this option you can select
any variation of your name. So this one
is a bit important because this is the
name which will be shown in your blog
posts. So if you write a blog post this
variation of your name will be shown as
the author name there. So make sure you
select the best variation from here.
Right now let's scroll down. So here we
can change email, we can change website
address, but I'm not going to mess with
these right now. So let's scroll down
more and you'll find that new password
option. Just click on set new password
and it will just suggest your strong
password. You can keep it and of course
you can type your own password.
So I just type my password although it's
saying medium but I'm just okay with it.
So scroll down and click update profile
and all the changes will be saved we
have made here. Okay. Right now let's do
some other settings. So hover under the
settings and click on this general.
First we have the site title. We can
change it to anything like
my e-commerce website and as you can see
this title will be instantly updated on
here. Then we have the tagline. In the
tagline, put some meaningful stuff like
best online
clothing store
in California like this. So, this
tagline actually can help you rank on
the search engines. Okay. All right.
Now, let's scroll down. You'll see this
membership option. If you check this
option, then anyone visits your website
will be able to register on your
website. And since we're making an
e-commerce website, so we should
definitely check this option. Right now,
scroll down. You'll see the time zone
setting. You can select any of these
options according to your location or
you can change the date format, time
format, anything in between. Okay. So,
let's scroll down and save the changes.
And under the setting, I'm going to show
you a really important setting, which is
the permalink setting. Click on here. So
here on the permal link structure we can
see by default this is selected the
plain permal link but in your case it
might be set to day and name month and
name number anything but I highly
recommend you to choose this post name
permal link because I'm going to show
you an example for example you choose
this plain permal link then your website
address will be looking like your domain
name slash some bizarre characters and
numbers but if we choose the postname
permal link it will be looking like a
page name for example about us
or contact. So this is more readable, it
looks good and this can also help you
rank on the search engines. Okay. So
make sure you keep it post name. Okay.
Now scroll down and save changes. All
right. So at this point I'm going to
make you familiar with two basic terms.
One is the back end and other is the
front end. So basically everything
you're seeing here, all the options, all
the contents is part of back end or the
dashboard of your website. But if you
want to see your front end website, you
can hover on the site title and click
visit site. And I'm going to open it on
a new tab. And let's go to the tab. So
this is our front-end website. And the
whole world can see this portion of your
website. Like if I just copy our domain
name and let's open a private tab.
And if anyone from anywhere in the world
just paste the link in their browser,
they'll just get to see this front end
page. They cannot see anything on our
dashboard or back end. Okay. Although
right now our front end website is
looking like this, but we can change its
look and feel using themes. So let's go
back to our dashboard. And if you hover
over this appearance, you'll get the
themes.
In here, we have some themes by default.
And this one, the 2025 is the active
one. But for example, if I activate this
2022 one,
then go to our front end website and
refresh,
the whole look and feel of our front end
website will be changed. Okay.
And of course, you can add new themes.
Just click on this add new theme. And in
the WordPress store, you can find
thousands of thousands of themes. you
can just install that and use that. So
from here I'm going to search for a
theme which is Wooifi
and from here I'm going to click
install.
Then let's go back to our themes
and activate this Ostify theme.
After activating this we'll have some
alerts and notification. I'm just going
to close all of these.
And also if we notice we'll see this
newifi option in our sidebar but we'll
get to that later. Now if we go to our
front ended website and refresh
and our website is looking like this
right now. I know it's still boring
nothing special because themes actually
don't have such control over the website
design. Themes just can add some base
functionalities some basic base designs.
But to really control our website
design, we have to use page builders.
And I think you already know what is the
best page builder for WordPress. Yes, it
is Elementor. With the Elementor, you
can just control every inch of your
website. And for this tutorial, we're
going to be using the Elementor's free
version. So, let's go ahead and get the
free version of Elementor.
You can just go to jimfad
digital.com
or if you just cannot find this post,
I'll just paste the link of this page in
the description. So just scroll down and
here you'll find this link get element
free account. Just click on it and we'll
be in the element's official page. From
here if you scroll down you'll see the
element page builder plan. Although we
using the element's free version but
with the element pro version you can get
so many features that is really helpful
for any e-commerce website. So if you
are making any e-commerce website in the
WordPress element pro version is highly
recommended. You can still make your
website with element free but element
pro just makes everything really easy.
Okay. All right. Now let's scroll up and
click on this element.
And from here click on this login. And
from here click on this create an
account because we don't have any
account. And you can just continue with
your Google, Facebook or Apple account.
But of course you can continue with your
email address. So I'm just going to put
my email
and choose a strong password
and just click create my account.
And after successfully logging in, we'll
be in our element's dashboard. Right?
Now that we have created our free
account, now we can close these tabs and
go back to our dashboard. So now it's
time to add the element as a plugin in
our website. So we have to just go to
the plugins. We don't have any plugins
right now. So click on this add new
plug-in.
And on the search plugins, I'm going to
search element.
And you'll see the element here by
element.
And we can just click on install now.
And now after installing it, let's
activate this. Click on activate.
And it will show an onboarding. So we
can just click on this cross to close
the whole thing. All right. Now, if we
go to the plugins, we can see the
element is here. Now, we actually need
more plugins to create our website
because as we are not using the element
pro version, so we're going to be
needing some other plugins. So, just
click add new.
Now, from the search, I'm going to
search for elements kit. Just search it
like this. And you'll see elements kit
element add-ons and templates by Roxnar.
So, this plug-in will add so many
widgets for our design purposes. Just
install it.
Then we need some other plugins. This
time I'm going to search Met form
and you'll get this one. With this you
can build contact form, survey, quiz and
custom forms using element page builder.
So install it. This is also by Roxnar.
And now we need one of our main plugins
which is called oocommerce.
Search it.
You'll see U-commerce by by automatic.
And this is the plug-in will turn our
website into an e-commerce website. So
install. Okay. Now let's get more
e-commerce plugins. Search here more
convert wish list.
And you'll see this. This is by more
convert team. Install it. Now let's go
for our final plug-in which will be
variation
swatches. And you'll see the variation
swatches for oocommerce by Imran Ahmed.
Click install. And if we go to the
plugins, click on plugins. We'll see so
many new plugins has been added which
are not activated yet. So what I'm going
to do, select all of them like this.
Okay, we cannot select some of them. So
after selecting from the B action,
select activate and click apply.
All of these plugins will be activated.
Now before activating this plug-in, we
have to activate this one. So click on
activate manually and this one will show
some setup from here. So just click on
no not ready now just to skip this and
go back to the plugins.
Woocommerce is activated. Now let's
activate the variation swatches. Okay,
now all of our plugins are nicely
activated. Elementor is for creating our
website or building our website from
scratch. Elements kit will add more
widgets into the elementor. Made form
will add functionality to create uh
forms, quizzes with the elementtor. Then
this plugins like more convert wish list
will help to build wish list for
e-commerce. Then variation swatches will
help us to create variation products for
our website. And finally, last but not
the least, Woo Commerce will turn our
website into an e-commerce website
easily. And if you notice, after
installing and activating all the
plugins, we have extra options. So many
options like MC wish list, WooCommerce,
product, payment, analytics, marketing,
so many options, right? So all the
options will help us to build our
preferred website. Okay. Now, as we're
ready to go with the plugins, we're
going to set up our oocommerce. Click on
the oocommerce
and it'll show us setup. Just click on
this skip guided setup. But we have to
select a country or state here. So,
select your state and click on go to my
store.
It'll load for a few moments and it will
be in the oocommerce. Now I'm going to
skip all of this stuff and directly go
to the settings.
All right. So under the general first
we'll set up our store location.
So if you have any physical store or
even any office you can just put the
address on this address line one like
city, zip code, avenue, road number, all
of these. Okay. And address two is
optional. You can put if you want but
I'm going to put the city name here.
San Diego and scroll down. So in the
country or state I just selected the
California. Okay. After that add your
zip code here.
So I'm just going to add my zip code
here. All right. So this was the
location or address of our store. Okay.
Now scroll down. We have this general
options. We have the selling location.
On the selling location we have three
option. Sell to all countries. Sell to
all countries except for then sell to
specific countries. If you select sell
to all countries, your product is
sellable to all the countries. If you
select the specific country, you can
select any specific country to sell your
product to. For example, I'm typing
Canada. So, currently your product is
only sellable in the Canada. Okay. So,
I'm just going to delete this. Then we
have another option which is sell to all
countries except for. So basically you
can exclude any country. For example, I
type United Kingdom. So now your product
will be sellable to all the countries
except for United Kingdom. Okay. So this
is how it works. But for me, I'm going
to select this sell to specific
countries and then select United States
because I simply don't want to sell my
products overseas. All right. All right.
Then we have got the shipping location.
We have options. Ship to all countries
you sell to, ship to all countries, ship
to specific countries only, disable
shipping and shipping calculations. So
the first one is obvious like ship to
all countries you sell to like if I sell
to all the countries it should be
shippable to all the countries right and
we have other diverse options like ship
to all countries even if you don't sell
to all countries then ship to specific
countries only like you sell in every
countries but don't ship to that
countries maybe you have digital
products like ebook or any virtual
products then only you sell those
products but you don't actually need to
ship in that case You can select this
one or you can select disable shipping
and shipping calculations. But for me,
this one suits the best.
So I'm basically shipping all my
products to the countries I actually
sell to. So basically my store is based
on the United States only and my
products are only shippable within
United States. All right, simple. After
that we have this tax option. By
enabling this tax option, we enable all
the tax rates and calculations. This is
actually really important because if you
sell your products in multiple
countries, you should have different tax
calculations for different countries.
Even only United State has state based
calculations like each state has
different tax calculations. So I'm
definitely turn this on and we'll
understand and set up the taxes later.
Okay. After that you have the enable
coupons option. With this you can enable
coupons for your store. So by using some
codes your customer can get discounts.
All right. After that we got the
currency options. So first of all we can
set up the currency that what currency
we accept. You can choose US dollar, you
can choose Canadian dollars, euros but
for my store I'm going to choose USD.
All right. Now that's it for the
general. Let's now save all the changes.
All right. After we have products tab,
right, so first option here we have shop
page. So in here we can select which
page do we want to make our shop page.
Basically this is showing all of our
pages. So I'm just going to keep it
shop. Okay. Do you have this placeholder
image? So when there is not any product
image by default as a placeholder it
shows some default image. So we can just
set the maximum size of that image. I'm
going to put here the seven. Okay. After
that we have the measurements. First on
the weight unit we have multiple options
like kilogram, gram, ellipse. And
because we're selling furnitureures, so
it will be best to choose kg or ellipse.
Okay. So I'm going to choose the kg for
now. Then you got the dimension unit. In
here we have meter, centimeter,
millimeter, inches. So I'm going to
select the inches. And here we have this
product reviews. You can turn on the
product reviews on any product so people
can add reviews or feedback on that
product. Then product ratings to enable
star rating on the product. So I'm just
going to keep everything checked except
for this one. Okay. So let's save the
changes.
All right. Now let's move to the tax
tab.
So under the price entered with tax we
have the option yes I will enter prices
inclusive of tax and then no I will
enter prices exclusive of tax. So if you
set this to yes your product price will
be shown with the tax charge included.
But if you select no your product price
will be shown without any tax rate or
any tax charges. But of course, people
will be able to see the tax rate later
when they're checking out the product.
Okay. So for me, it makes sense to
select the no option so that customer
only can see the original price of the
product, not the tax included. Right? So
I select the no. Okay. Now scroll down.
Keep everything as it is here. But on
this additional tax classes, we have two
option. One is reduced rate, one is zero
rate. And we actually can see this
option on here. The default one is
standard rates. Then we have reduced
rates. Then we have zero rates. We don't
have to understand these really deeply
for now. But just on this field, I'm
going to add my own rate.
And I'm going to call that
custom rate. Okay. Now scroll down.
Skipping everything just save the
changes.
And after saving it, you can see this
custom rate has been added on this tab.
Okay. So this is our custom rate. We
will edit this custom rate. So just
click on it and we'll be here and this
is the place we will calculate the text
rate for our different states or
countries. So let's pay attention here.
So first click on this insert row. It
will simply add a row here. And first
thing here we have to add a country
code. And because the USA has
state-based tax rate, so I have to add
the state code. So to find out the
correct tax rates and code, let's go to
the Google and search for USA tax rates
tax jar
and you'll find this state link. Just
click on it and it'll just show the
whole map of USA with all the state
codes like California, Nevada, Arizona,
New York, everything. Okay? And if you
notice different state has different tax
rates. This one has 2.9% tax rate where
Washington has 6.5% tax rate. Okay? So
we need the tax rate for the California
which is 7.25%.
All right. So we got the tax rate. Now
let's go back and here on the country
code we'll just add USA. Just type US
and United State will be selected. And
then on this field we have to add the
state code which we can see for the
California this is CA. So just type CA.
Then I'm going to skip all of these and
go to the rate. So as California state
has 7.25%
tax rate. I'm going to just type that
number first. And after typing the
number, I'm going to add two zeros. I
just added two zeros to complete the
four decimal places. Okay. So, the whole
number just means 7.25%.
All right. Then on the text name, just
put tax like this. Nothing else. On the
priority, keep one. And on the shipping
turn this off because I don't want any
tax charges on the shipping. Now after
making it like this you can save the
changes. So basically we have calculated
and decided the tax rate 7.25 for
California US. Now any product we sell
into this location will cost this
percentage of tax. Similarly you can add
more row like let's add a new row here.
type US then instead of California this
time let's say we select New York so the
code is NY
and New York has only 4% of tax rates so
just put four here and add four zeros
just to have four decimal places okay
and on here type tax then priority one
and uncheck the shipping
and save changes and now we have just
calculated the tax rate for New York and
now let's say let's insert one more row
and here let's say I type USA but on the
state code I don't put anything just on
the rate let's say I put 5% tax rate and
let's fill up all of these and save
changes
so I have made a new rule which means
doesn't matter which state you're
selling your products to it will only
cost 5% tax. Okay, because I just didn't
select any specific state code. All
right. Now, if you want, you can remove
any selected row. For example, I
selected this. You can click on this
remove to remove that. You can select
like this and remove it like this. Okay.
So, I'm just going to keep one row for
now. All right. Now, save the changes.
So, this is how you make any rule for
tax rate and calculate them correctly.
And for example your store is outside of
USA. So in this case you can search
Google that what is the tax rate in your
area and based on that information you
can just calculate your own tax rate
here. All right. Okay. I think that's it
for the tax. I hope you at least get an
idea about this. So now let's move to
the shipping.
Okay. So in the shipping you can add
shipping methods and rates. So first
let's add a shipping zone to add the
shipping rates and shipping methods on
it. Click on add zone. You have to put
the zone name. So I'm creating a zone
setup which is rest
rest of the country. You can name it
anything. Now this is zone region.
Currently this is everywhere but you can
select any specific region like here I'm
searching United and I'm selecting
United States and you can select
multiple regions as a zone. Now for
selecting we can click on add shipping
method. So first here you see create
shipping method which is we have two
option which is free shipping and flat
rate. For now I'm going to click on flat
rate and click on continue.
So you can rename your rate here. You
can rename it anything like regular
rate. And you can keep the text status
taxable or none. If you want to add text
on shipping, you can keep it taxable or
if you don't want keep it none. Now this
is cost. So this is basically shipping
cost or delivery cost. If I make it
5.00. So basically my product shipping
cost will be $5. Now this $5 is actually
per order. I'm going to show you
example.
So this is a product right and we can
select the quantity of the product. For
example, a customer buys five of this
products. In the quantity they select
five and purchase five watches in a
single order. So the shipping cost of
the five watches will be only $5. But if
you want the other way, like every
quantity of product should cost $5, you
can do that as well. Just leave a space
and type star. Leave a space third
bracket. Type QT y close it with third
bracket.
Now what will happen?
Before it was costing the customer only
$5 for shipping this five products. Now
it will cost $25.
So $5 for each product or each quantity
of the product. You can actually do it
if your products are heavy or really
hard to ship. But as a electronics
product, it makes sense if you keep it
only five, not quantity based. You can
charge them $10 for shipping, $9 for
shipping. So in a single order, doesn't
matter how many product they choose, how
much the quantity is, they'll cost only
$9 per product order. Okay.
So here I'm keeping $5.00
per order. Now from here I'm going to
click on create and save. So here I
added a regular rate which is $5 per
order. Now if you want you can add more.
Click on add shipping method. This time
I'm going to show you how to use the
free shipping. So select the free
shipping. Click continue and you'll have
some option. You can choose the name
first then then free shipping
requirements.
What free shipping requires? Click on it
and you'll see multiple options. First
no requirement then a valid free
shipping coupon. Then minimum order
amount. Then things like a minimum order
amount or coupon. Then a minimum order
amount and coupon.
So let's select the minimum order
amount. So in the minimum order amount,
let's say I put $150.
So if any customer orders for more than
$150, they'll get free shipping. This is
the requirement of the free shipping.
They'll have to spend more than $150 or
$150. This is the minimum amount. Now in
here, you can click on uh create and
save. and this method will be added. Now
we can select any method during the
creation of the product any time. I'm
just keeping all these options
available. Okay. Now we can also create
shipping classes, different shipping
classes other than the regular rate or
free shipping. Scroll up, go to the
classes. We can click on add shipping
class. So for example, you have some
product in your store that is really
heavy or really hard to ship or it has
really expensive packages. You can
create different class for that like
premium shipping. You can add any slug
in here. So you understand that you can
add any description. Actually you have
to add a description for for the
heavy
packages.
Okay, then you can click create.
Now if we go back to the shipping zone
and we we can see the rest of the
country is already added. We can click
on edit
and it has two shipping methods regular
and free shipping. We can go to the
regular rate. Click edit. Now in here
you'll see more option has been added.
The shipping class costs. Now we can set
up if that product has the premium
shipping what that will cost. Maybe I
type here $12. And here in the no
shipping class cost, if it doesn't have
any extra packages or premium packages,
it should be back to by default $5.
Okay, just put the same amount here as
this amount. So when we will be creating
products, we can select whether it's a
premium shipping or any regular
shipping. Okay. And you can add as much
classes as you want. Okay. So let's save
and we'll discuss more about it and more
practically about it later during
creating the products. Okay. So now
scroll up enough ideas for shipping. Now
we have to set up payments for our
e-commerce website. Right. so that
customers can pay us directly on our
website. So click on payments
and you'll see few options like accept
payments through u then PayPal payments
then things like take offline payments.
This is basically cash on delivery. If
you click on it this is the basic step
like you can click on it and see direct
bank transfer, check payments, cash on
delivery. These are the offline
payments. But we want to add really
popular payment methods like Stripe and
PayPal. And for that, we're going to
need two simple plugins. One is for
Stripe and one is for PayPal. So, you
can really quickly go to the plugins.
Scroll down, click on add plug-in,
and in here we can search Stripe
and you'll see this one, payment plugins
for Stripe Woo Commerce. And this is by
payment plugins. We need this one. We
don't need other ones like this. So
click on install here. Installed. Now we
need one for the PayPal. So from the
search I'm going to search PayPal. Just
search it. And the same way you'll get
this one uh payment plugins for PayPal
WooCommerce. And this is also by payment
plugins. So click install now. Okay.
After installing, let's go to the
installed plugins
and simply activate these two. Selected
like this from the bulk actions. Select
activate. Click apply. And these two
plugins will be activated. Okay, we're
done. Now we have to go back to the
oocommerce settings. Hover on the
oocommerce. Go to the settings and then
click on the payments. Now once we go to
the payments, you'll see so many option
has been added after installing the
plugins. So before we didn't have the
Stripe option, but now if you scroll up
here,
you'll see this credit cards Stripe by
payment plugins. This one, this is a
really nice one. And this one is already
activated. We can see, but we have to
manage this one. Before that, let's
enable the PayPal one also. So scroll
down all the way to the end. It should
be here. Okay, this is here. PayPal
gateway by payment plugins. This is
inactive. So click on enable. If you
want, you can also turn this PayPal
credit card gateway by payment plugins.
But this one is good enough. Now we have
to set up the Stripe with our e-commerce
website. So click on the manage.
You'll land here. But we need to go to
the API settings. We need to connect the
API of Stripe with our plug-in here. So
if you have the stripe account, log into
the stripe.
So after logging in the stripe, you
should see a dashboard like this. And
from here, click on developers
and click on API keys.
Scroll down. You'll see the publishable
key and the secret key. First click on
here to copy the whole key. Go back to
the oocommerce or dashboard.
And here scroll down you'll see the
publishable key. So on this field delete
and everything and paste that
publishable key from the stripe. Now go
back to the stripe and copy this secret
key. Go back here, delete this secret
key and paste the new one. This is our
secret key. Now if we click on
connection test and this is saying
connection test to stripe was successful
and this is on the test mode but when
you're doing it for real when you're
connecting the stripe account for real
it will the procedure will be the same
but make sure on your stripe you are on
the live mode. Click on the switch to
live mode here it will show some setups
like adding your real cards and stuff.
So after completing this verifications
and all you'll be in the stripes live
mode not in the test mode and also in
here before pasting the publishable key
and secret key make sure the mode you
select is live from here. If you want me
to make more detailed video about
connecting stripe let me know in the
comments. I'll make a detailed video
about connecting Stripe with oocommerce.
Okay. So for now I'm just keeping it on
the test mode so I can show you how
purchasing works. And in the test our
method is successful here. Now I'm going
to scroll down and click on save
changes.
So our Stripe is all done. Now during
the purchase we can select Stripe card
to pay. Okay. Now the Stripe is done. We
can go back to the payments and manage
the PayPal account. Scroll down. You'll
see the PayPal gateway and click on
manage.
Click on API settings again. And the
method is exactly the same from the
environment. When you're doing it for
real, don't select the sandbox. Just
select production. That means live. Then
from the PayPal's dashboard, you can
copy the production key. You can paste
the production client ID and production
secret key. But if you don't want to do
that, you can just click on connect to
PayPal.
And just after logging in with your
PayPal account here, everything will be
automatically connected. The payment
gateway or or the payment method will be
automatically set. Okay. So here I have
connected my PayPal account and it the
status says connected. Okay. Now save
the changes and we're done with our
payment methods. We have two options.
One is Stripe credit card and other is
PayPal payment gateway. Now we have the
other options. Now these options are not
that essential but if you want you can
just check them out. I'm just keeping
everything default here. Then let's go
to the side visibility. In here we
actually got to do some things. So if
you notice here it says store coming
soon because our store is on the coming
soon state. But from here, if we just
select the live option and save the
changes, our store will be live. Okay,
so this can be really useful when you're
doing the production and finally
releasing it. All right, now let's go to
the advanced and you'll see you can
actually set up the pages for cart page,
checkout page, my account page. So for
the cart page, I'm going to keep the
cart. For the checkout, I'm going to
keep checkout. And for the account, I'm
going to keep the same account. Okay,
just keeping everything default. All
right, now let's move ahead to creating
our products for our online store. And
this is my favorite part. So from the
sidebar, scroll down and click on this
products.
And obviously, we don't have any
products in our website yet. So from
these options, we can click on this
physical product because I'm going to
show you how to create a physical
product first. Then I'm going to move
ahead to show you how to create variable
products, group products, then virtual
products. So let's click on here.
All right. So here first we have to add
a product name.
So I just pasted a name for my product.
Now we can close this popup introduction
pop-up. Okay. So after we have the
product description. So if I show you
the description is basically this text
right here, right?
So let's add a description here.
I just added by the way this is a really
high rich text editor. This is fully
like a Google doc or uh Microsoft Word.
You can select any text and edit that
specifically like you can make it bold.
You can make itallic like that if you
want. And also you can select any text
and color that text specifically like
this. Okay. So I'm going to keep it as
it is. Now if we scroll down this is the
product data. First of all from here
make sure you select simple product
because we are creating a simple
product. Under the general this is
regular price and this is sale price.
For example I put regular price as $70.
Type the price like the $70
0. Okay. Then if you want you can add
sale price like $65.
Now on the product page this price will
be cuted and this this price will be
shown as current price. Okay. Now you
can select the tax status as taxable
shipping only or none. I'm going to keep
it taxable and we can select the tax
class and you'll see the tax class you
have created on the tax setup. Right now
after that we can go to the inventory
and on the SQ the full form of the SQ is
shopkeeping unit and this is basically
an unique identifier for each product.
So as an SQ I'm just going to copy the
whole title from here. Paste the title
in here and delete all the space instead
add hyen like this
just like this. And this is an unique
identifier for this specific product.
Then we can select the stock management.
If we check it, we can show the
quantity. How much quantity is left for
this particular product. If this is 10,
customer will see only 10 products left
on the store. If you make it 100, you
have 100 of these watches in your store.
So, let's skip it 50. Okay. After that,
you can go to the shipping and this is
the shipping informations like weight
and dimensions. So, weight is on the
libs. So, you can put the product weight
exact weight in the libs here in the
libs unit. So I'm going to put a
specific weight like this 0.22 libs
which is around 100 g. Okay. But if you
want you can change the weight unit as
kilogram or g and the dimension is in
the inches. So you can add the length
like 2 in. Then width which is actually
refer to the whole box of the watch. The
width should be like 1.7 in and height
should be like half of an inch. Okay.
And from the shipping class, you can
choose the created shipping class which
is this premium shipping if you want,
but I'm not selecting it because this is
a regular product. So, no shipping
class. Now, you can go to the linked
products. You can add any products as an
upsell or cross sales. If you have any
other products on your store already,
you can show that you can show that
product as a upselles or cross sales.
But we don't have any product in our
website. This is our first product. So
I'm going to tell you I'm going to talk
about this options later when we have
more products. Okay. Also, I'm going to
show you all these options attributes
when we are creating the variable
product when the watch will have
multiple colors. Okay. So this this all
you need for a simple product. Nothing
you have to do. Just scroll down and
this is the short description. And
that's the description you see on the
products. Short description right here.
So we can add a really short description
like this. Okay. Now let's focus on the
right side of the product. All of this
metadata. First we can save this product
as draft and save it later and publish
that later. Then you can edit the status
visibility. Then publish on date. You
can edit the date and all of the meta
data. Now, if you scroll down, we have
this product image. We can set any
product image as a thumbnail of our
product. If I show you
in the shop page, we'll have this
product images or product thumbnail,
right? Then if we click on any product
here, it's showing the product real
image. So this is the place we we can
set the product image from. So click on
here and it will open the media library
where we keep all the images, all the
videos files for our website. And this
is currently empty. I'm going to upload
some images in here. By the way, if you
want to use all the images I'm going to
be using here in this project, you can
just go to jimfodgial.com.
Link is in the description. And if you
just click on this download the
resources I have used in the tutorial,
you'll get a asset zip file and from
Google Drive just simply download that
file.
Then unzip that folder
and in the folder you'll see two
folders. One is templates. We're going
to be needing this later. Then one is
images. Click on the images and you'll
have all the images I'm going to be
using in this tutorial. So, let's go
back here. From here, I'm just going to
upload all the images by dragging and
dropping it in here.
Now, all of our images is being uploaded
in the image library.
Let's wait a few moments.
Okay, all the images has been uploaded
perfectly. Now, from here, we can choose
a thumbnail for our product.
I'm going to select this one and click
on set product image and this image will
be here. This is a transparent image and
we can see this image as a thumbnail and
the product image like this. Now if you
want you can add product gallery from
here. Click on this add product gallery
images.
So from here we can select multiple
images like this like select an image
and click on add to gallery. it will be
added. Then click on gallery again.
And select another image.
This will be added.
Okay. After that, we have the
categories. We can categorize this
product by using categories. So I'm
going to deselect this uncatategorized
and click on this add new category. We
can add any categories like men's watch
and click on add new category.
Then add another category like
women's watch.
And we can dis we can select multiple
categories like this or select only one
category like this. After that we have
the product tags.
You can add any tags related to that
product like women
red strap
analog like this. Okay.
So these are the tags and categories.
Then here you can add the brands like
from what brand is this watch for. Then
of course you can add a product video
URL and the video will be played as a
product intro video. Okay. So after
adding all the information, all the
metadata, all the images, you can just
click on this publish to actually
publish this product on our website
store.
Now if we go to our front end website,
this is a this is showing a random post
page. But we can go to our shop page by
entering an URL. So after our domain
name, if we type /shop
and click enter, it will take us to our
shop page. And we can see this watch has
been added. We can open it. And by
default, without any customization, this
is looking like this. We can see the
real image. We can see the original
image. We can swipe through the
galleries like this.
And we can see all the information like
the product name, product price, short
description, product stock, then
quantity selection and add toart button
and all the metadata like these. We can
see the description. You can see the
additional information, the weight,
dimension and also the reviews.
And we'll fix everything here messed up
like the buttons are overlapping each
other. We'll fix that everything in
customization. But we can say we have
created our first physical simple
product.
And now I'm going to show you how to
create variable product. If you have
products or watches that has different
sizes and different colors, I'm going to
show you how to do that. So let's go
back to the products. And from here we
can click on the product.
We can see one product. Now we can click
add new product.
So, first of all, we got to add a title,
right? I'm going to rename this timeless
elegance man's chronograph watch. Nice
name. Now, let's add a product
description. I'm going to paste the
description here.
And as you can see, we can actually add
tables as well because this is a rich
text editor. But on this watch
information, we can just select it and
make it heading two to make it bigger
looking. Okay. Now I'll scroll down. We
have the product data. So first of all
from the selector we're going to select
the variable product. Now after
selecting variable product you see that
uh price option is gone. The price
option will be on a different part. I'm
going to show you. But first of all what
is variable product? I'm going to
directly show you an example product. So
this is a variable product. It has
different color variables blue, gold and
silver. And as you see for different
color variation, it has different
prices. The price is being changed when
I'm selecting different ones.
So we want the color variation for our
own product.
And here the pop-up is saying start by
adding attributes. Add attributes like
color sizes and all. So we can go to the
attributes and add the attributes color
sizes and all but I recommend you to go
to this attributes under the products.
Go to the attributes but let's open it
on a new tab so we don't lose this
progress in the product creation and
also if you want you can just publish
it. So it's saved. So as it's saved now
we can go to the attributes. So in here
first we got to add a name of the
attribute. I'm going to name it color
and on the slug you can add like accent
color accent color of the watch. It
means that now under the type let's
select color and then click on add
attribute.
Now we can see the color is added here.
Now we can click on configure terms.
Now we can actually rename the colors
directly. like first I'm going to make
it blue and here like blue accent color
and if you want you can add a
description but we have this color
picker here we can pick a color directly
from a color picker like I'm choosing a
blue color from here and clicking on add
new color this blue will be added here
now we can add another color like gold
then on the color picker. We can choose
a gold color. Something like this. You
can also add color code in here if you
want. So, we got the golden color. Now,
click on add new color. And let's add
our last color, which will be silver.
And from the color picker, you can first
select the white and choose a gray color
that looks like silver. Or if you can
Google the silver color code and add the
code in here. So this is the exact
silver color I have added. Now click on
add new color.
So basically we got three colors silver,
gold and blue. And these are our color
variations. Okay. After creating it we
can close the tab and go to our product
creation and make sure you update it
first so it saves the product creation
and it'll automatically refresh as well.
So scroll down. Now if we go to the
attributes then we can add existing
attribute from here. So I'm going to
search for color and the color is
showing. Select
and you'll see the color will be added
like this. Then on the select values we
can search for different uh color
variations like blue, gold, silver. But
I'm going to click on this select all
and it'll select all of the colors. Now
I'm going to click on save attributes.
Okay. After saving the attributes I'm
going to go to the variations and this
is the important one. So here we have
two option. One is generate variation
and add manually. I recommend you to
click on generate variations
and it will ask for the confirmation.
Just click okay.
And it'll generate three color variation
blue, gold and silver. And we can edit
the individual ones. Like if we open the
blue, we can add different image for the
blue. We can add different im different
price for the blue. We can add different
sale price for the only blue. Then
things like weight, dimension, we can
add all of those things for specifically
blue color variation. Okay. So from the
upload image, I'm going to click on it.
So for the blue variation, I'm going to
select this watch image. It will be
thumbnail for the blue. Then for the
blue, I'm going to add the price here.
So the regular price 110 and the sale
price maybe $90.
And this is in stock. You can add
different weight, length, width, height.
I'm going to put it quickly.
Okay. Then you have option to select
different uh shipping class like this,
text class like this, and uh different
description for different product. But
I'm not going to add the description
because we already have the description
field otherwhere. Okay. So, let's close
this blue one, blue variation, and open
the gold variation. And for the gold,
I'm going to choose the image. So, from
here, I'm going to select this one.
And this one's price 100 and sale price
$80. And you can add so on. Now, I'm
going to close the gold and add the
silver image.
and choose this image. This watch has
silver accent color. Then on the price,
maybe the price is $100 and sale prices
$75.
Okay, so we have added the prices and
all the information for each variations.
Now we we can still go to the inventory,
add an SQ. I'm going to add the SQ same
as the title, but of course modified
like remove the spaces and add hyphen
instead
like this. I'm going to also turn on
stock management and make the quantity
30 only. Then globally we can add all
the metadata and product image. So,
choose a product image for the whole
product. I'm going to scroll down and
choose the golden one as a thumbnail of
the product. This will be by default
shown. Now, of course, we can add other
gallery images. Click on here. So, in
the gallery, I'm going to put blue.
Also, I'm going to add the silver one as
a gallery. And if you want, you can also
add a hands-on image from the gallery
like this. this. I'm going to choose a
random one. And of course, you can
choose the categories. Deselect the
uncatategorized. Select men's watch. And
if you want, you can add another
category.
You can add brand name as a category
and select that. Then on the tags, just
put anything you want.
You can also click on here and choose
from previous categories you have
created.
I selected analog.
then choosing
or making blue, gold
and silver.
Okay, so just adding randomly some
categories and as a brand you can add a
brand name like this. Okay, so this is
enough. So this is our variable product.
Let's publish this or update it and see
how it's looking in our page right now.
So after publishing, let's go to my
store.
Go back. Go to the shop page. And we can
see the variable product is added. And
on hover, it's showing the gallery
image. And as you see, this is showing
it a little bit differently. On hover,
this is showing add to cart, which is a
simple product. But on hover, this is
showing select options. Let's open this
product.
And we can see alongside all of the
information, this is showing color
attributes or color variations. So we
can click on the blue. The image will be
changed to blue. We can select gold.
Image will be changed to gold and it
will be silver like this. We can also
click on clear to clear the variation
choosing. And also the uh different
color has different prices as we set up
right. So it has all the informations
and here this is now showing related
product like the it's showing this
product as related product because it
has a similar tag and similar category
as this product we have right this is
men's watch the category is men's watch
and also this products category is men's
watch so this is showing as a related
product
everything is like smart and automatic
with oocommerce. We don't have to worry
about tiny details. Okay. So this was
our variation product where we can add
same product but with different
variations. The same way we have created
the color you can create other
variations like sizes, brands, all of
them. Okay. All right. Now I'm going to
show you how to create virtual product
or digital product.
If you want to sell any digital product
on your website related to watches like
an ebook, you can do that. I'm going to
show you how to do that. So click on add
new product.
And first I'm going to show you an
example of it.
So in our shop you see this product.
This is a digital product or virtual
product.
This is about complete guide for strap
adjustment, time setting and maintenance
for a watch.
So after anyone buys this product, they
can directly download this PDF file
attached with this product. And I'm
going to show you how to do that exactly
like this. So first let's add the
product name.
And one more thing I didn't show you.
This is the perma link and you can see a
link generated as a page link and this
is based on the exact title we're having
here. So if you want you can click on
edit to edit that permal link. I'm going
to show you what this is for. So if you
if you open a product right on the
address bar you'll notice the product
title is on with the link right. So if
you want you can adjust or edit the
product title as a permal link right
from here. Okay.
All right. Now let's go ahead and add a
product description
here. Now scroll down and from under the
product data this time we're going to
select the simple product but on the
right side I'm going to click on virtual
and also check the downloadable option.
Virtual makes the whole product virtual
and the downloadable makes the product
downloadable. We can attach files like
PDFs, videos or anything we want. Then
first we have to set the price here.
Let's set the regular prices $50. And we
don't have any sale price. Then we have
the downloadable files option. Just
click on the add file and we can add
files through any link or click on
choose file and directly choose any
files from your media library. So in
here I'm going to upload my PDF file. So
I have a PDF file which is this all
about the watch. Now I'm going to upload
that PDF file in our media library.
Just drag and drop the PDF file like
this in here. it will be uploaded
pretty easily and just click on insert
file URL and this URL will be selected
and this URL is from our web hosting or
our media library. If you want you can
add more files but I'm okay with this.
Now we can set up a download limit. How
many times a customer can download the
PDF file after purchasing. I like to
keep it unlimited. Then download expiry.
I like to keep it never. Then uh this is
taxable status. I'm keeping it taxable
and tax class keeping it standard. Okay.
Now in the inventory just put a simple
sq really simple like this and it'll
work. Now let's go to the right part and
add an image for the PDF. So click on
here choose thumbnail and in here I have
a thumbnail already for the watch PDF
and insert this image. Now scroll down.
We can add a new category which will be
called ebook selected. Now on the
categories we can add
many categories like this
like this. Okay.
Now you can just publish this product.
Now if we go to our store,
we can see this is our virtual product.
We can open it. We can purchase it. You
can select the quantity. But it doesn't
matter how much you how many you are
purchasing because this is a digital
product. But other than that, this is a
simple product with all the information.
But you can see there is no extra
description at all because this is a
virtual product. It doesn't have any
dimension at all. Also, there is no
related product because we don't have
any categories or tag matched with any
product. Okay, this is the difference.
Now, we learned how to create a digital
product.
Later, I'm going to show you if a person
buys this product, how they can download
the PDF file. It's really easy. So, we
got three kind of products. simple,
variable and virtual. Now I'm going to
show you the last type of product which
will be really interesting which is an
affiliate product. So let's click on add
new product.
Okay. So first thing let's add a name
then add a description.
After that now from the product data
select external or affiliate product.
Now everything will be gone and this
product URL and the button text will
show up. First you have to put your
affiliate link like here I'm putting my
Amazon affiliate link. Now here on the
uh button text you can say buy product
or you can type buy from
Amazon like this. So people know this is
an affiliate product and it will take
them to the Amazon product page. Now you
can uh put the price. I'm going to make
it the exact price as the Amazon $107.
And the rest of the options doesn't
matter like taxes and tax classes
because this product will be purchased
from Amazon page, not our page. Okay.
So, we can of course select a thumbnail
for this. So, you can see the image from
here. I'm going to select this one.
And as a gallery image, we can add one
more image like this.
And also we can select any category for
from existing ones like this. And also
add tags from existing ones.
Now we're ready to publish this and
we'll see how it looks. Publish. Go to
our shop.
Refresh the page.
And you'll see the affiliate product has
been added here. So, we can click on the
product. It'll take us to the product.
Okay, we didn't add the short
description here. So, we can go ahead
and quickly add the short description
here like this. And update
and go back there. Then refresh the
page.
And we can see this is the product and
this is an affiliate product there.
There's no quantity selection or stock
left showing. We can see all the details
all the related products to this. Now if
we anyone clicks on this buy from Amazon
it will take them to that exact Amazon
affiliate page and from there they can
easily buy that product.
So with the affiliate link you earn the
commission from Amazon selling it on
your store. Okay. So these were the four
kind of products. simple product,
virtual product, affiliate product, and
the variable product. Now you know how
to create all of these. So we can go to
our dashboard and click on the products.
We can see we only have four products,
but to fill up our store to make it look
good, I'm going to quickly add more
products behind the camera. I'm going to
quickly add the products and come back
to you.
Okay, I have added all the products the
exactly same way. Now if we go to our
store, our shop, we can see this is full
of products. Now our store is looking
fulfilled. You can add as many products
as you want. The process is exactly the
same I've showed you. By the way, here
I'm going to show you a thing. You see
the star rating here. So you can
basically star rate any product and the
product you star rate will be basically
featured products and later we're going
to add featured product in our homepage.
It will look really nice. Okay. So now
before we start to showcase our whole
e-commerce system how it works. Let's
create coupon codes for our products. So
through the coupon code we can add
discounts on our product and it's really
easy just go under the marketing and
click on coupons
and from here click on add new coupon.
So here basically we have to add the
actual coupon code. So for example I'm
adding JFD
20 and in the description I'm typing 20%
discount. Okay. Now after that we have
coupon data. So in here we have the
option discount type. Currently this is
fixed card discount. So for example on
the coupon amount if I make it 50
doesn't matter what the product price
is. The coupon code will give $50
discount. But if we select the
percentage discount and we type 50,
doesn't matter what the product price
is. By using that coupon code, the
product price will be 50% less or
discounted. So I prefer the percentage
discount and also the coupon amount I
want 20. So it will be 20% as our
description says 20% discount. Then we
have the option allow free shipping. So
if we allow this, if we check this by
using this coupon code, the shipping
will be free for that product. Okay. So
I don't want that. But if you want, you
can allow it. After we have the coupon
expiry date. So if you click on here,
you can choose any specific date. For
example, I choose 14. So after this
date, the coupon code will be expired
and no longer eligible to use this
coupon code to have discount. Right?
Then let's go ahead and go to the usage
restriction. In here we have so many
options like minimum spend, maximum
spend. So in the minimum spend, you can
add a number. For example, 100. So, in
order to use this coupon code, customer
has to at least purchase or at least
spend $100 while purchasing the product,
right? And this field, this maximum
spend, this field allow you to set a
maximum number a coupon can be used on.
For example, we have 20% discount and
the maximum number of product is $500.
So if anyone buys product more than
$500, they cannot use this coupon code.
They no longer will be able to use this
coupon code to have discount on the
price. Okay? Even if it's $51,
the coupon code won't work. Okay? But I
don't want any limitation, any usage
restriction. So I'm just removing all
the numbers. So the minimum spend and
maximum spend is unlimited.
Okay. So let's scroll down and we have
the other options like products. You can
choose any specific products to attach
the coupon code on. So for example, I
select a product in here, this luxury
goldplated women's. So this coupon code
will be only available for this specific
product which is this. You can add more
products, more than one products in here
if you want.
Exactly like this. So this coupon code
will be only available to these two
products and you can also exclude
products like if you select any products
here just search the product
and you select one product here. So on
that product you cannot use this coupon
code. It's like this. But I don't want I
don't want to uh include or exclude any
product from the coupon code. I'm going
to keep it empty. And also you can uh
associate this coupon code I mean make
the coupon code exclusive for product c
specific product categories specific
product brands then allowed emails all
of these. Okay.
Then we have the usage limit here. It
has usage limit per coupon. You can set
a number like 10 1 2 3 any any number or
keep it unlimited. So this coupon can be
used unlimited amount of time. Okay.
Then you have the limited use to X item
and usage per usage limit per user.
Let's set the usage limit per user 10.
And the rest I want to keep it unlimited
and empty. Okay. So we are basically
created a coupon. Now we can just
publish it and the coupon will be
available to use. Okay. During the
checkout I'm going to show you how to
use the coupons. And now actually we're
going to overview the whole system of
e-commerce. How people can buy it, how
people can add to cart, add to wish
list, then after how they can purchase
it. So let's start with adding some
products in our cart. So from the shop
page, let's add some few random products
like this. Just click on add to cart
and it will be added to the cart. a
sidebar. A mini cart will be show up
here. You can just close it like this.
Then let's add one more from here. And
then let's add this virtual product
also. And as you can see these are being
added nicely here. Then let's add one
which has multiple variation like this
one. So for this one we have to click on
select options. Then it will take us
inside the product. And from here we
have to choose colors and variation.
Like from here I want the blue one which
price is this and select the quantity.
Then click add to cart. This one will be
also added to the cart. And we can see
the shopping cart is the number is four.
Right now for product is selected or
added to the cart. So we can open the
cart right from here and click on view
cart to open the cart. By the way,
before that, let's see how wish list
works. So, from here, I h click on add
to wish list
and the product will be added to the
wish list. Okay. And we can see the wish
list by going to the dashboard. Click on
the users icon and go to the dashboard.
Here we have so many settings like
dashboard, my wish list, order,
download, so many things. I'm going to
go through every of them later. So first
let's go to the wish list. My wish list
and you'll see true product I have just
added into the wish list showing here.
And from here you can also click on add
to cart to move the product to the cart.
From here you can share this product or
wish wish list on any social media in
here. And this is the wish list. And I'm
going to show you all these options
after we make a purchase. Okay. So from
here let's open the mini cart. Then we
want to see the whole I mean full cart
page. So click on view cart
and it'll open the full cart page where
you can see the products all product
details. Then you if you want if any
customer wants they can increase the
quantity of the product. Then if they
want they can remove the product from
here. Then also on here it has a add add
coupon option. In here they can add
coupon codes but I'm going to add the
coupon codes in the checkout. Okay. Then
they can see the subtotal here. Then
they can see the regular rate which is
the shipping rate. And this is the
estimated total which is this amount.
Okay. Now after seeing all the
information people can click on proceed
to check out.
And this is our checkout page where we
fill up our contact information like
email then shipping addresses. In here
we have to select the country or region,
our first name, last name, address,
city. So very quickly I'm going to add
all the details and come back.
Okay. Then it has a phone number which
is optional. And then if we scroll down
here we have the payment options. First
the card is selected which is by stripe
but you can choose the PayPal also. And
during the checkout it will ask for the
PayPal login or PayPal payment request.
Okay. But now for now I'm going to click
on the card number to add my card. Okay.
So let's add the card card number.
Then if you scroll down, you can click
on save payment information to my
account for future purchases. Okay. So
I'm going to do it. I'm going to check
this
so it will be easier for me to buy
products with my card in the future.
Okay. Okay. Now if we focus on the right
side, we can see the order summary. All
the products are showing here. Now here
we have a option add coupons. Okay. So
here we can add the coupon codes we
have. So earlier we have created a
coupon code called JFD
20. And if we type the coupon and click
on apply the coupon code will be working
and we're getting $100 discount. This is
showing it like this. And all together
with all the discount and charges our
total price is this amount. So after
seeing this just scroll down and click
on place order
and after placing the order it'll show
the thank you page. It says thank you
your order has been received. It'll show
the order number, date, total, payment
method, all of these. And it has a
section which is downloads because if
you remember, we have added a virtual
product into our card and purchased.
This is called complete guide for strap
adjustment, time settings and
maintenance. So we can just click on
here under the download and a PDF file
will be downloaded directly which we can
read like this.
It's cool. And under the order details,
we can see all the order details. The
individual prices, subtotal, discounts,
shipping, and total. Every information
we want to see, it's available here.
Okay. Now, it says order has been
received, which means the order
information is sent to the administrator
of the website. So as an admin from our
dashboard we can just go to the orders
to see the order. Uh from here scroll
down hover over the oocommerce and go to
orders
and we can see this order is pending or
processing. We can see the name of the
client and if we click on here we can
open that particular order. In here we
have so many options. We can see all the
details all the order details we we need
to see. Now from the status we can we
can make it processing on hold completed
canceled refunded failed or draft. So
I'm going to make it completed as an
administrator.
And from under the orders actions, we
can choose actions like send order
details to customer, recent new order
notification, then generate download
permissions.
So I'm going to click on send order
details to customer and click on update.
And the customer will get a order
details copy and the order will be
completed. Now as an user if we go to
our dashboard
then we go to the orders
we can see we have this order. We can
click on view and we can again see all
the details and we have the download
link for the PDF file. Okay. So this is
our orders. Now we can go to the
download option and from here we can
again download the PDF file. The
downloads manage all the downloadable
things. Now we can go to the addresses.
If a customer wants they can edit their
billing address and shipping address
just by clicking on edit billing address
or edit shipping address like this. They
can totally change all the information
like first name, last name, street
address, country, city, zip code, phone,
literally anything. Okay. Then they can
go to the payment methods to add more
payment methods or delete existing
payment methods. Then we can uh they can
go to account details to manage all the
personal information, password and all.
Then finally they will have a option to
log out from the account. All right. So
this was the basic overview of how the
whole e-commerce system works. So we can
say our e-commerce is working perfectly
fine but one problem is our landing page
or the main website is looking really
ugly like there is nothing there is no
cache there is no interest of exploring
the website. So we're going to replace
our landing page or the front page with
a nice and professional website design.
I'm going to show you the design we're
going to be adding today.
So for that just go to kitninja.com.
I'll put the link in the description.
So this is kitninja.com. Here you'll
find super professional e-commerce
websites designed. These are made by
professionals with years of experience.
The designs are super dedicated for each
niche. And there are so many categories
of website design, so many categories of
niches. And the perk is they're super
affordable. So from here, I'm going to
search for the template we're going to
be using today or creating today. So
from the search here, if you search
wristy
and in here, you'll get an element
template kit which is super professional
and at the same time affordable. Let's
watch it. Click on here.
So from here you can click on live demo
and you can see the website like this.
You can check the mobile responsiveness,
tablet responsiveness, everything. And
of course if you click on this visit
site,
you can experience the whole website
live like this.
This is really super professional. As
you can see, everything just looks
really good.
So, we're going to be designing exactly
the same template today for our
e-commerce website. But as you know,
designing a website like this takes some
time. Although I can show you how to
create these kind of website in 2 three
hours. But to actually build those
following me can take one day or
multiple days. So if you don't have such
time to create an website like this, you
can actually get this exact design and
you already know where to get it. Just
go to kitninja.com and from here you can
easily purchase this template for a
really good price. But let's say you are
a freelancer or an agency. In that case,
you can actually grab all the template
kit Kit Ninja has in one go. Just click
on grab buy all deal and here you can
get access to all premium template kits.
You just have to download the templates
and import it to Elementor. And if you
scroll down in here, you'll see the
single versus all access comparison. So
with the all access, you're not only
getting 100 plus template kits rightway,
you're getting five plus new templates
per month. And of course, you'll get all
of their future updates in the single
plan. That means everything they upload,
if you have the lifetime access plan,
you'll get those templates right away.
And everything you are getting with this
plan is just for $59.
If you are a freelancer or an agency,
with all of these template kits, you can
easily earn $1 to $5,000 making websites
for your clients because the design of
these templates are the greatest. All
right, now let's go back to our
tutorial. So, if you want to buy the
template we're going to be using in this
tutorial, which is this one, it's called
wristy. You can just buy it really
easily. Then watch 2 minutes video guide
and you can just install it on your
website and your website, your
e-commerce website will be looking like
this in no time. But still, if you want
to make the whole website step by step
with me, then let's continue and go back
to our tutorial.
Okay. Now in order to create a homepage
like this, we have to create page right
then when we'll be creating other pages
like uh blog page, contact page, about
page, we're going to create those pages.
But first let's create a homepage. So
let's go back to our WordPress
dashboard. From here, click on the
pages.
So under the pages we can see so many
page has been added and it's mostly by
oocommerce by default uh some pages like
cart page, checkout page, dashboard, my
account all of these added by
oocommerce. Okay. Now we have to create
our own page. Click on add page to do
that
and you'll see an interface like this.
So on the add title I'm going to name it
home. just home and click on publish.
Then again click on publish and the
homepage will be published. So we can go
back
and we can see the home is added here.
We can click on this uh view
and we can see the homepage is looking
like this. There is literally nothing.
This is a fully white empty page. But if
we go to our front end website, like if
we just type our domain name, it's
landing us to a totally different page
where you can see a random post and
random informations. We don't want that.
We want our homepage to show to be shown
if we type our domain name. So to do
that, go back to the dashboard
and scroll down under the settings. Go
to reading and we have the option your
homepage displays. Currently this is
your latest posts which we can see this
random posts but instead we'll select a
static page and from the homepage we
want to select the page. So we have just
created this homepage right? So I'm
selecting this home as homepage. Then
scroll down and click on save changes.
Now if we just go to our domain name
from anywhere in the world from any
browser, it will always take us to that
homepage we have created. Although it is
fully empty and white, but we're going
to turn this empty and boring page into
this masterpiece of a design in this
tutorial today. Just trust me and follow
the process.
In order to customize this, we already
have Elementor page builder. So, let's
go back to the dashboard. Go to the
pages and open the homepage. Just click
on the home. And we want to edit this
homepage using element page builder. So,
we have the option edit with Elementor.
Click on it.
And from here, just close the
notification. And we can see our
homepage is opened by element page
builder. And the real fun will begin
from now. We can see our front end
website and the element page builder
looks exactly same. We have a default
header. We have a default footer and in
the middle this is fully empty exactly
like this. Right? So in in the empty
space we will add elements like these.
Okay. all of these. I'm going to show
you exactly step by step how to do it
all.
But before we dive into creating our
design, let's understand or get familiar
with Elementor page builder like how it
works. Okay. So on the right side, as
you can see, we'll build a website from
scratch. But if you notice on the left
side, it has a sidebar. And inside the
sidebar, it has widgets and elements
like layout, containers, grid, heading,
image, text editor, video, button, all
of these basic elements. But if you
scroll down a little bit more, you'll
see the pro drop-down. In the pro,
you'll have some advanced tab like
search, posts, portfolio, gallery,
image, galleries, loop, carousel, all
all of these. But these options or these
widgets only comes with the Elementor's
pro version. But don't worry, we can
build our website only by using
Elementor page builder because in the
free ones there are so many elements and
widgets and also we have our third party
plugins like elements kit. With the
elements kit there's there comes a lot
of plug-in and widgets. Then with the
mid form so many we'll get so many
customization widgets. Okay.
Here you can see one more uh widget or
plug-in which is more convert. Using
this we can create design of wish list.
Okay. So for now I'm just going to turn
this off like this like fold this and
we're going to use mostly from the
layout and the basic. Okay. So let's see
how element page builder works. First we
can drag any elementtor and drop it
inside this box. Let's say I add this
container. And the container basically
adds a basic box like this. And if you
now notice on the left side, the whole
thing has been changed. We have so many
options just for this newly added
containers. So we can control this
container right from the uh sidebar. For
example, we can make the content width
full width. Now, if we decrease the
width like this, you can see the box
width has been decreasing. Then you can
use main height to control the height of
this box.
Then if you want, you can go to the
style and click on this background type
classic. And if you click on the color,
you'll be able to pick any color for
this container
or for this box.
Okay. Now, within this box, inside of
this box, you can also add items or
contents. So, click on this plus or this
plus and all the widgets will come up
again. Now, let's say I add this heading
widget inside of this box. It will be
inside of this box. Now you can triple
click to change the text or you can use
this field on the left side to type any
text
exactly like this. Right now if you want
to style this text, you can go to the
style tab of this text. Then we have the
alignment with it. We can center the
text like this. Then we have the
typography. We can open the typography.
And there are so many options like font
family. There are so many font styles or
family available for free. We can choose
any font family like this and it will be
instantly changed to that. Then we can
search for font family like one of my
favorite font family is poppins. I'm
searching and selecting it will be
instantly changed to that. Then using
the size slider we can decrease or
increase the size of the text or if you
want you can put the exact value you
want for the text. Then using the weight
we can make the text thin or bold.
Higher number makes it bolder. Lower
number makes it thinner. Okay. Then we
have the transform. Using it we can make
the text uppercase, lowerase, capitalize
all of these. Then with the decoration
we can make the text underline,
overline, line through all of these.
Then using line height we can increase
or decrease the line height of any text
line. Then with the later spacing we can
literally add space between each of the
letters. And similarly with word spacing
we can uh increase the space between
each of words.
So combining all of these options you
can create really nice typography. Okay.
So I'm just uh selecting the value and
and clicking backspace to delete and
making it back to default. Okay. Now
let's close the typography. We have
other options like the text color using
it. Obviously we can change the text
color to anything we want.
I'm making the text color like this for
now. Okay. So this was an example. Now
let's add more kind of uh elements or
widgets to showcase. Let's say I add
this text editor. The text editor also
adds a text widget or text element. But
this time we get this super rich text
editor with it. We can literally select
any portion of text like this and
individually stylize that like changing
its color. You see the color has been
changed then styling it making it bold.
itallic, underline, all of these. So
this is basically like Google Drive or
Microsoft Word. With it we can do many
things. Okay. But of course it has
global stylization like go to the style.
You can of course make it center. Then
open the typography to choose a font
family like popins, increase or decrease
the font size like this. Then uh control
the font weight and all of the other
option comes with the header. Of course,
you uh will be able to change the text
color to anything.
So, this this text editor widget is more
suitable for paragraph kind of text and
this heading widget and is more suitable
for heading text like big text. Okay.
Now, let's add one more final element
like this button. Just drag and drop
under the widget and a simple button
will be added. You can change the button
text from here like change to anything
read more like this and under the link
you can put any link you want for
example you type here google.com
now if any person clicks on this button
it will take them to google.com another
example like you type Facebook.com
your
account. Now by clicking on this button,
it will take them to your Facebook
account. How cool. Okay. Now this button
also has its style tab. In the style, we
can make the position center to make it
center. Then the button also has the
typography because it has text in it.
Like we can open the typography, make uh
choose any font family. And of course we
have the size slider like this. Then we
have so many other options like the text
color. By the way, you can click on this
color sampler and pick any color
anywhere from your screen. Just click on
the color and select the color. And the
button color will be exactly like this.
Then we have the buttons background.
Select classic. And you can change the
background color of this button like
this. Super simple.
And I'll show you so many options
available with the button later in this
tutorial. So this is how basically
element works. By the way, I want to
show you some spacing things. So with
the button, we can go to the advanced
and we have the margin. So if I unlink
the margin, we can put individual value
to each side. Like maybe on the top I
type 100 and you see on the top of this
button 100 pixel gap or space will be
added. Then I type 50 pixel on the
bottom. On the bottom 50 pixel space
will be added. Okay. Now I'm going to be
showing you a really important concept
which is flexbox.
So this blue box is the main container.
Right? We can also follow this container
and all the structure in the structure
tab. Click on the container. And in the
container we can see under the container
we have the heading, text editor and the
button. So we can select the container,
go to the layout and scroll down. Let's
make the width a little bit longer like
this. And scroll down. If we make the
direction row, all the elements inside
will be ordered in a row. But if we make
it column, everything will be placed in
a column. Okay. Then we have things like
justify content center to make it
vertically centered. align item center
to make it horizontally centered. Then
gaps to add gaps between elements like
this. Okay, so I think it's enough
theories and explanation for how element
page builder works. Now we'll actually
get to the real work and turn our
website into this. By the way, if we
publish this website or the homepage,
then we go to the front end website and
refresh. Before it was a fully empty
page, right? But after refreshing you'll
see it is turned to this design we have
designed in the element page builder.
How cool. Okay. So from the structure we
can just we can right click on that
container and click on delete to delete
all the example stuff.
Okay. Now first we're going to start
creating our banner section. The banner
section is this. It's divided into two
part. So let's start. All right. So the
first thing we're going to add is a new
container in this box. And on the
structure, I'm going to double click on
that container and rename that banner
section. Basically, renaming any
container doesn't do anything
functionally, but it just to keep
everything organized. So you can follow
me step by step perfectly. By the way,
uh through the tutorial, follow this
structure so you'll know what I'm
adding, what I'm deleting, where I'm
placing things. Okay. So, first I have
added a container which is named banner
section which is this. All right. So, on
the banner section sidebar, first keep
the content with boxed but make the
width 1240
pixel. Okay. Then scroll down make the
direction row. So anything I put inside
it will be placed in a row like I have
showed you earlier. Now scroll down.
You'll see the gaps is by default 20
pixel on the column and row. But I'm
going to make it all zero.
Now I'm going to color my banner
section. I'm going to color it exactly
like this. Half of the color is this
beige type of color and half of the
color is fully black. So there's a
really nice and easy trick to do this.
go to the style and choose the
background type gradient. So basically
with the gradient color we can choose
multiple or two colors at the same time
for any container. So on the first color
which is this I'm going to type a color
code here to achieve that color. Just
type hash fff 7f3.
We'll have a beige type of color which
we can see on the top. We can barely see
it. Then if we make the location here
50%, it'll be taking half of the space
of this container. Okay. Now let's edit
the secondary color. Then here type a
color code which will be fully black. So
type 0000 0.
This code is for a fully pure black.
Okay. Now also make the black's location
50% and the black color will also will
take 50% of the whole container.
Now I want to change the angle. Right
now this is uh 180° but if we make it
90° the angle will change. This is
really fun. You can just play with the
angle as you can see like this. But I'm
just going to make it 90°. So half of
the uh container is this color and half
is black color. Okay. Now scroll up go
to the advanced tab. Now let me reduce
the padding. So using the padding we can
add space inside of this container.
Using the margin we can add space around
a container. For example on the top I
add 100 pixel. On the top 100 uh pixel
space will be added. But if we uh make
the padding top 100, you'll see the box
will add 100 pixel on the top but inside
of this box within the box not outside
like this. Okay. So this was an example.
So delete the margin. Just make it
default like this. But let's make the
padding 30 pixel on the right, 30 pixel
on the left. So we have a nice gap on
the left and right. Okay. Now inside of
this banner section, let's add one more
container within it. Now this uh make
sure this container content width is
full width and make the width 50%. So
this container will take only 50% of the
whole container space. Then scroll down
and make the gaps zero. Then go to the
advanced. I'll link the padding on the
top 172
on the right 47 and keep the bottom and
left zero. So we'll have g the gap like
this gap or space like this. It will all
make sense once we start add the
contents and items inside the container.
For now just uh keep following me as I'm
doing. Okay. Now the first thing we're
going to add here is a text editor.
Click on here. Scroll down. Add the text
editor within this container. Now let's
change the text. We don't want any dummy
text in here. I'm going to change it to
elegant collection this text. Now go to
the style. So here first of all we're
going to edit the typography. Click on
the pencil icon. And as a font family
I'm going to search a font which is
called jost. And this is a really good
looking phone as you can see. Now for
the size, I'm going to make it 16 pixel.
So it'll be this big. And keep the
weight 400. Then scroll down and make
the line height. First from here, select
the em property. This is a different
unit size unit. So uh on the line
height, type 1.5 and it will be like
this. Now close the typography. Now
let's add a text color. So on the text
color, let's make it fully black. If we
just drag this knob all the way bottom
and left, it will be all 0 0. So fully
black color. Now scroll up, go to the
advanced only the margin. I want to add
some uh space on the bottom. So 16
pixel. Let's make the g uh padding zero.
Okay. So after this text editor, I want
to add a heading widget here. And let's
change the heading text. I added the
heading text like this. But you see it's
added in a single line or a single row.
But I wanted it like this. So after this
first two words I'm going to type less
than bran
and it will be the exactly like this.
Okay. The line will be broken with this.
So now let's go to the style to style
this text nicely and of course open the
typography and for this one I'm going to
search a really good looking type uh
font family which is called Marcelus.
This is that select it and you see this
font is actually really good looking.
Now let's make the size exactly 64
pixel. It will be this big. Then make
the weight
400. So it will be a little bit lighter.
Then scroll down and you'll understand
the line height a little bit better in
here. You see as I'm dragging and
dropping like dragging and sliding the
line height is controlling like this. So
I'm going to make the line height first.
Select the em type 1.06.
It will be like this. And finally, I'm
going to make the later spacing minus
two. So later spacing will compact I
mean uh compact the text like this.
Okay. But it should be only minus2.
Now let's close the typography. Go to
the advanced and also on the margin
bottom make it 16 pixel. Okay. Okay,
after this heading, I want to add
another text editor right here and
change the text. I'm going to add a
short description or short paragraph.
Now go to the style and open the
typography. This font will also be merc.
Okay. Now the size will be 16. Weight
will be 400.
And that's it. Now let's make the color
a bit. I'm going to add a color code
696866.
Just type this color and you'll have
exactly the same color. Okay, now this
is looking like this. Nice. Okay. Now go
to the advanced and also I'm going to
add margin bottom 70 to pixel. All
right. Now I'm going to add an image
which is will which will be this image.
Okay.
So click on plus and you'll see the
image widget. just drag and drop it here
after the text. So from here we can
choose any image. Click on choose image
and if you already have the resources I
have given you have downloaded the
resources from here you'll see all the
images in the media library. So from
here I'm going to choose an image. I'm
going to select this one. This is called
image 8. WEBP. Click on select. And this
image will be loaded here. Now we have
to make this image this shape right
rounded on the top. It's actually really
easy. First go to the style and first
make the width. Select the pixel. Type 3
1 2 pixel. The size will be like this.
Then let's make the image height. Put
the exact value 3 80 pixel. The height
will be like this. But you see the image
is actually stretched. To fix that, make
the object fit here. Cover and the image
will be nicely covered or nicely cover
the whole container without stretching
the image. Okay. Now scroll down and
you'll have this border radius option.
So using the border radius, we can
actually make the image rounded. Like if
we make it 20, you see the corner will
be rounded. But I'll link the value on
the top make it 250 pixel and the top
will be rounded like this and on the
right make it 250 and all together it
will be rounded just on the top. Really
cool right? All right. So finally I want
to make this image all the way on the
left side exactly like this. So just go
to the advanced tab and make the align
self start and it'll be just on the left
side. Okay. All right. Now let's add a
button a really nice button like this.
We can simply click on the plus and add
a button right after the image. It'll be
added here. First let's change the text.
This button says shop now. And on the
link, let's add our shop page. Just type
shop and the shop page will be
suggested. Select the shop page. So by
clicking on that shop now, it will take
the customers to our shop page. Nice.
Now go to this style. First of all, open
the topography. And for the font family,
I'm going to choose just and font size
only 16. Font weight keep it 400. and
line height select em 1.5.
And finally the later spacing make it
minus 0.5.
It'll be a little bit compact. Okay.
Close the typography.
And let's make the text color within it
fully white. Just drag the knob all the
way to the top and left. It will be 6F's
code. So white. And I want to add a
background color. So background uh type
classic and background color let's type
a code which is C39074
and you'll have this exact color. Now by
default this button will have a default
uh border radius a little bit rounded
corner. So to turn that off make the
border radius zero and the button will
be fully sharp and have corner.
Now using this inner padding of this
button we can decide the size of the
button. So let's unlink the button
padding on the top 12 then 28 12 and 28
pixel. So overall shape will be like
this. Pretty cool. Now we can actually
add hover effects on button. Like here
if you see if I take my mouse on this
button this is being black like this. So
we can add this kind of hover effects
really easily.
Go back to the elementtor and scroll up.
We have this hover tab. If you switch to
it, you'll have another options. For
example, I make the text color fully red
and the background color fully blue. Now
if I take my mouse in here, the text is
being red as this and background is uh
being blue as this. Okay. Let's make the
text color fully white and the
background color fully
black color. So on the hover it will be
looking like this. Really cool. Now one
thing left is we have we you need to
place this button nicely on this image
like this. So it is only possible by
going to the advanced tab and making the
position to absolute. After making
making it position absolute, we can
actually take this element anywhere by
hand like this like put it anywhere in
the screen. But we don't want to put it
randomly. We want to make it precise. So
scroll down. We have the horizontal
orientation and vertical orientation.
With the slide, we can set the exact
placement. So first make the horizontal
orientation left. Then make the offset
to 72 pixel. It will be here. Then make
the vertical orientation on the bottom
and offset
136 pixel and the button will be exactly
here. Looking really nice with this
image.
Okay. So on the left part one thing is
left is this nice image. This is adding
a little bit depth. So we can add that
image exactly like this button. So click
on the plus add an image widget.
after this button. So the image will be
here. Choose the image. Scroll down.
Scroll down and you'll have this
it'll be here. Now straightly let's go
to the advanced tab and make it position
absolute. And as you know you can put it
anywhere with hand but let's make it
precise. Horizontal orientation right
offset 55. Then vertical orientation
bottom offset 340 pixel. It will be
exactly here. So with this our lipped
part is fully done. This is looking like
this. But of course if we close this
panel we can see it in full screen.
Although this is looking like this, this
is not being full screen. We can fix it
really easily. Open it. Go to the page
settings. Scroll down and make the page
layout element full width.
After making it full width, if we now
close the panel, everything will be full
width matching with our targeted design.
Right?
Perfect.
Now let's actually publish this page
because we don't want to lose any
progress we have made so far. Now if we
go to our front end website which is
this still looking like this right now
because we haven't refreshed it. So
let's if we refresh this page our front
end website now it will be looking like
this already looking really cool. Let's
add stop on the right side exactly like
this. So now let's focus on the right
side. Let's uh move the structure on the
lip like this. So under the banner
section we are having a container right
which is placed on the left side which
is 50%. Right now we need another
container like that just for the right
side. So what I can do is right click on
that container and click on add new
container. A new container will be added
right after that.
Now also on the container make the width
50%.
And this container will be using 50% and
will be on the right side. Now let's go
to the advanced make the padding. I'll
make it first just on the left
138 pixel.
So it will add 138 pixel on the left
side. So it stays separated with this.
Okay. Now inside this container, let's
add a new container. And just for the
sake of uh organization, I'm going to
rename this font so you won't get
confused by the same name. Okay. So,
make the font uh content width boxed
first. Then make the width 1240 pixel.
Then make the min height first. Select
this pencil icon which is custom. And on
the min height just type 100%.
So this container will must uh use 100%
of the height. This banner section has
just using 100% of the height. Okay.
All right. Now inside this container,
let's add an image widget.
The image will be here first. Then
choose the image
from here. I'm going to scroll down and
choose this image. This is called image-
7 webp. It will be here. By the way,
select back the cont. Go to the
advanced. Make the padding zero. And
you'll see there would be no default
padding within this container. If we
didn't make it zero, you'll see it would
be looking like this. But just make it
zero to remove that. Okay. So, let's
work on the image. We want to make the
image exactly like this. So first go to
the image style, make the width 450
pixels and height 580 pixels. And to fix
this image, make the object fit cover
and object position center. Now scroll
down and unlink the border radius and on
the bottom 250 and on the left to 50. So
on the bottom side it'll be rounded.
Perfect.
Now let's go to the advanced tab and on
the margin make it 28 pixel.
Okay. Then after this image let's add a
text editor here. Change the text to
this. Go to the style. Make the
typographies font family just font size
16.
Weight 400. And finally line height 1.5.
Close.
By the way, I wanted to make the
alignment center. So, it would be like
this. And finally, make the color fully
white.
Okay. Now, scroll up, go to the
advanced, and I want to add a custom
width with this text. So, on the custom
on the width, click on custom. And on
the custom width, first make it pixel
and type 450 pixel. Then make the size
here custom.
And by default the flex grow will be one
and flex shrink will be one. And this
text will be like this. Now after this
text let's add a new container.
And let's make the containers direction
row justify content and align items end.
And also make the gaps 44 pixel. Now
inside it I'm going to add two images.
First add this image here. Choose the
image.
So basically the image will be this one.
So I'm going to scroll down and find
this one.
It'll be simply added here. But let's go
with the style and decrease the width to
160 pixel. Then then the height to 62
pixel and make the object fit cover to
fit it. And finally make the border
radius 150 on the top and uh right.
It'll be like this. And finally we're
going to go to the advanced and do a
magic here. If you scroll down and open
the transform we have so many options
but we need to use this rotate. And with
the rotating and with the rotate we can
you know rotate this image any how we
want
but I'm going to make it 20°. Okay.
Image will be here. Now I'm going to add
another image exactly like this. So
instead of creating an image like this
I'm going to right click on this
existing image. Click on duplicate to
have exactly the same one again. Now
just change the image. Scroll down to
this image. It'll be changed to this.
Okay. Now the final thing just select
the container. The container holding
these two images. Right. Select the
container. Go to the advanced.
I'll link the margin on the top 20
pixel. And on the bottom make it minus
95 pixel. So it would be like this.
Exactly like this. But the problem is
this is the image is going outside of
this container that is looking bad. So
we have to hide this part. We have to
hide this portion of the image. Right?
And this is really really easy. Just
select the banner section again. Go back
to the layout. Scroll down all the way.
Open the additional options. And under
the overflow if we make it
let me scroll down to here. If we make
it hidden, the images extra part will be
just hidden. Nothing can go outside of
this banner section.
Perfect. Now the final thing I'm going
to add is this nice little images.
So first after this container,
let's add an image. Just select the
container like this. And if we click on
image, not drag and drop, the image will
be right here looking ugly. But let's
fix it. First, select the image. Scroll
down. Scroll down.
And you'll see this image. This is
called star one. PNG.
Now we have to make it absolute. So it
takes no space. Scroll down here. Make
it absolute. It'll be here. Then make
the horizontal right offset minus 46 and
vertical on the top offset minus 250
pixel. So the image will be here. If we
close the panel it would be here. Okay.
Now finally one more image. Just click
on. Now the problem is the image is gone
somewhere because one mistake is done
here. This image is uh under this
container but it should be outside of
this container. So let's drag and drop
this image outside of this container.
And you'll see this image would be here.
Now you can just keep this image
anywhere you want after this container.
But don't keep the image inside of this
container. Okay.
So the placement will be exactly here.
Nice. Now let's add one more image.
Duplicate this image and select image.
Scroll down. You'll see this one. This
is called star 3 PNG. And let's make it
this is already absolute. But make the
horizontal left offset minus 50 vertical
bottom offset 150 pixel. And it'll be
right here looking gorgeous.
So if we compare our website to this,
this is looking exactly same. But we can
see this image is a little bit uplifted.
So we can do the same. We can let's open
it. We can select this image. We can go
to the style. If we just little bit
increase the height, it will be bigger.
Let's make it 292
like this. And it'll be a little bit
uplifted. Looking really nice. Okay. So
overall we can say our banner section is
looking done. It's looking really
perfect. Now we're going to move ahead
to our next section. But before that
let's publish so we don't lose all of
our hard work.
So also in our front end website we can
see the update. This is looking like
this right now. Really perfect.
Okay. Now I'm going to close this banner
section. And right after that I'm going
to add a completely new container and
call this container categories
section.
So the category section will basically
be this section where we show the
categories and by clicking on that it
takes us to the shop page of that
category. So it'll be really nice and
easy. So before we start to create our
category section I'm going to show you
the global settings. Global settings in
the element can save a lot of time of
making an website design and it's really
easy. Just click on this element logo
and click on side settings and it'll
show many options but we need to work on
just few of them. First go to the global
colors and you can see some default
colors like primary, secondary, text,
accent. All of these color has different
colors but we want to make it our own
colors. Our website's own theme colors.
Okay. So on the primary first I'm going
to make it fully black. Then on the
secondary I'm going to type a color code
which is this C3 9 074.
We have used this color earlier, right?
So this using this color will be really
easier than before. Then let's make the
text color 6968
666. Okay. And finally I'm going to make
the accent color same as the secondary
color. So from here we can copy this
color code and add it to the accent. Now
I want to create some of more colors
custom colors. So click on add color.
I'm going to rename this white and click
on choose color and make it fully white.
FFF then click on add more. Then I'm
going to make it I'm going to type the
name transparent
and from the color I'm going to make the
color fully transparent by dragging the
second slider all the way to the left.
So the color will be transparent. Okay.
Now the final color I'm going to be
adding is called atomic. And the color
code for this one will be this F29
766. It will be this color. Okay. Now
click on save changes.
Now from here click on the back button
to go back. Now in the global fonts
we're going to click on here. So the
concept is same primary secondary text
and accent but instead of default fonts
like Roboto Roboto slab we're going to
add our own most used font. Okay. So
first I'm going to search just this is
one of the most used fonts we're using.
Now actually for the primary I'm going
to search merciless. Select merciless
and make the weight 400. This
combination will be most used. Then
close the typography. Then open the
secondary. In the secondary I'm going to
choose a font which is called libé baser
vial. This is really weird sounding
font. But trust me, this font is really
amazing looking. Okay, choose this font
and then open the text. This time select
the jost font family. Keep the weight
same and finally the accent. Keep the
same joust font and just keep the weight
500. And that's it. Click on save
changes.
Go back. Now the next option we're going
to go is in the typography and this
typography will save us a lot of time.
Let's go. We're going to set the
typographies for body H1 H2 H3 for once
and later we don't even have to work on
the typographies anymore. Okay. So for
the body body color click on the earth
icon instead of the typing the color
code and you'll see all the code all the
colors we created. Right. So from here
I'm going to ch choose the text and you
see we didn't have to type the color
code anymore. Then open the typography
and the font family would be jo. So all
of our normal text or the body text will
have just font by default. Okay. Now
scroll down. We have the H1. H1 is
basically these I mean H tags are
basically this heading text. Okay. So on
the H1 I'm going to make the color fully
black which is the primary. Then H2 make
the same black. H3 black. H4 black. H5
black. And H6 black. Okay. Now after
adding the color, let's add the
typography quickly. Open the H1's
typography. Make the family
marcellus and make the size 64. Then
weight 400 and line height 1.06
and later spacing minus 2 pixels and
close it. Then open the uh H2
typography. But instead of opening, I'm
going to first select the primary from
here by clicking on the earth icon.
Select the primary. And if we now open
it, you'll see the Marcelus is already
selected. Now just make the size 40,
font weight 400, and line height make it
1.3 emm and also later spacing minus 2.
This process can look a little bit
lengthy, but trust me, after making or
filling all of these presets, we won't
have to select the typographies again
and again for the design we're creating.
Okay. Now after uh H2, make the H3
typography first. Select the secondary
and you'll select this weird sounding
font family but make the size 48 pixel
and uh make the later spacing sorry not
the later spacing line height 1.25
and later spacing minus2 makes it
compact. Now make the H4 primary.
Make the topography
I mean size 20
and line height
1.2
and layer spacing minus 0.5.
Close. And then second last H5.
Select the primary
and keep the weight 400. That's all. And
finally the H6. Make the uh typography
text
and just make the font size 20 pixel and
line height 1.5.
Okay. Close the typography and that's it
for the typography and you'll see the
result. It will be really timesaving.
Okay. Now save the changes from here and
go back. Now skipping all the options.
The last option we have to go to layout
and first make the content width which
is the width of the whole page or
website make it 1240 pixel. We had to
type manually this 1240 pixel width but
this time I'm making it global. So we
don't so we don't have to type this
value again and again for every section.
And then also with this container
padding let's make it zero and we don't
have to type zero at all again and
again. Same for the gaps just make it
zero and we are good for the global. Now
scroll down one last uh setting will be
the break points. In the break points we
have desktop mode, tablet mode and
mobile mode. But I'm going to click on
this plus and add laptop mode. Okay. Now
if we save click on save changes it will
say you have made modification to the
list of active break points. So you have
to reload. So click on reload now
and you'll see on the list alongside all
of these the laptop mode will be added.
We can see how the website is looking on
the laptop mode. Okay. So basically our
site settings is done. So we can click
on the cross to close it. Okay. Now we
may start our second section which is
category section. And this is really
easy and you'll see the result of the
global settings. It will be really fast.
Okay. Now let's work on the category
section. First you'll notice the width
is already 1240 pixel by the global
settings. Now scroll down. Just make the
direction row. And you'll also see the
gaps are by default zero. But for just
just for this section, I wanted the uh
column 48 pixel. Okay.
Now scroll up. Go to the advanced. I'll
link the padding to add some space. Nice
space within this section. On the top
120 on the right 30
120 pixel and 30 pixel.
Okay. Now within this container, let's
add one more new container. And we're
going to make this containers width 50%.
Then make the min height 6 40 pixel. It
will be this long. And here I wanted to
make the gap zero, but it's already
zero. So it's really helpful. Now scroll
up, go to this style, and let's add a
background color for this container. I'm
going to add a color code FFF7F3.
and we'll get this nice deep beige
color. Okay. Now go to the advanced link
the padding on the top 68
on the right 60 zero then 60 pixel.
Okay. Now we have to start adding the
content like the heading button watch.
Okay. So first let's add a heading. But
you'll see the magic here. The heading
is already styled for us. We just have
to change the text. And here we can add
beer quickly. The beer tag will break
the text for us. Now you see it is
having the exact style we are targeting.
It's already styled because we did the
global settings. We just have to add the
text and it will be automatically
styled.
How cool. Now we just need to go to the
advanced tab on the margin bottom 16
pixel. And now we have to add a simple
button. So from here let's add a button
first. Actually this button will be a
little bit unique like this. It will it
won't have any background just have an
underline and an arrow. So first let's
change the text to this. Browse the
collections. Then we can actually add
icons to the button. We can use the icon
library and add any icons from the icon
library. It will be added like this. But
this time we're going to use our own
icons. Click on upload SVG and click on
enable unfiltered files. So if you have
download the resources I have given in
the images you'll find some SVG images
which are in this browser icons. So I'm
going to hold control and select all of
them like this and drag and drop upload
this in the media. These are actually
all icons. Okay. So after uploading this
will show a glitch or bug. It's showing
just one icon. So to fix that click on
the close of this pop-up, publish your
uh page and refresh the whole page once.
Then scroll down go back to the section
here. here. Click on the button and then
click on the upload SVG and then you'll
see all the icons we have uploaded. So
from here select this icon this right
arrow. Click on insert media. It will be
inserted in the button. But I want this
icon on the other side of the button. So
we can use this icon position to end.
And let's add some icon spacing 33
pixel. It will be like this. Now let's
go to the style.
Now the typography is already accent. We
don't have to do much. We just have to
you see this is already selected as just
family. We just have to make it 20 pixel
and make the weight 400. That's it. Now
let's make the text color. Instead of
typing a color code, we can click on
browser icon, I mean earth icon, and
click on the text. The color will be
like this. But we have to make the
background of this button transparent.
Exactly like this. So we can make the
background color transparent by
selecting this transparent color we have
created and the background will be gone.
Now let's add some styles like this uh
border on the bottom. So we can use this
border type make it solid and it will
add a border around this button. But I'm
going to unlink this border width and
just on the bottom make it 1 pixel and
also make the border radius zero. Then
also make the padding zero but just on
the bottom make it 2 pixel. Now we also
can add border color. I'm going to make
the same color as the text this. So
overall this is looking like this. But I
wanted to add a hover effect exactly
like this. So we can first switch to the
hover make the text color our accent or
secondary color then also make the
border color our accent or secondary
color. So on the hover it would be
looking like this. How nice. So this is
how you make a transparent button. Now
inside this box I'm going to add a final
thing which is an image. Just drag and
drop an image in here. Choose the image.
I'm going to choose a product image.
choosing this
it'll be added here but I'm going to go
to the style and just use the height
make it 420 pixel also make the object
fit content so it will be shown the
image will show its full size it will
not cover or cut the picture okay so I'm
just going to publish and refresh the
page now our left part is done we're
going to add the right part quickly and
it will be super easy. We can just
duplicate this left part and change the
text and images, right? It's super easy.
So, we can select this container under
the category section. Right click and
duplicate. We'll have the exact same
thing. Now, we can just go to the style
of it, make the change the background
color to fully black and the text is
blending with the black. So, I'm going
to change the text color to fully white
color. And also change this button
color. Click on the button. Go to style.
Change the text color to accent color.
And also border color to accent color.
And the hover effect of this will be
maybe
this white. Okay.
So hover text color white, border color
white. So this is this. Okay. Finally,
I'm going to change the image. Just
click on the image and from here you'll
find this image. This is called bg.webp.
Select it will be first here. But we
have to make it like this nicely. Okay.
So first
I'm going to go to style and remove this
height. Okay. Then go to the advanced
make it position absolute. After making
it position absolute, this is
overwriting all of the elements behind,
but I'm going to fix it soon. But let's
uh fix the placement here. Make the
horizontal left offset zero, vertical,
bottom offset minus 20. And now we have
to select uh the heading. Go to the
advanced tab. Scroll down. Make the
z-index two. It will be over that image.
Then select the button. Go to the
advanced tab. Make the z-index two. It
will be over that uh image. Okay. So al
together this is looking like this. But
we can see a problem here. This
container is looking bigger than this
container. We can fix it. We just have
to give a height on this image. So on
the height
we can maybe make it
570 pixel on the height. And this will
be just fixed.
Perfect.
Okay. So, we're basically done with this
section. We have two section in our
website now. Looking just gorgeous.
You can add any link on this button just
by just click on this button and go to
the content and on the link add your
link. Okay. Now, let's move on to the
next section.
This section will be really interesting.
It will be our product section. in here
will show our bestseller products. Okay.
Okay. So, first let's take a new
container in here and I'm going to
rename this container product
section
one because we're going to have multiple
product section in the homepage. So, the
product one product section one will be
this section. we're going to have will
show some of our bestseller product in
the homepage. Okay. And this section
will be really simple to make. So first
let's go to the style and add a
background color for the whole section.
So click on classic add a color. I'm
going to add this color # FFF7F3.
You'll have this dark beige color. Now
go to the advanced. I'll link the
padding on the top 120 pixel on the
right 30 pixel on the bottom 120 and on
the left uh 30 pixel. Now inside the
product section, let's add a new
container
and let's make the containers direction
row. Then justify content space between.
I'm going to explain you why I'm
choosing this uh space between then make
the ele items center. And that's it for
the container. Now inside this
container, let's add a heading widget.
Click on the plus.
Drop this widget in here and change the
text to best
seller and make sure the HTML tag is H2
and the H2 is already styled in the
global right so we don't have to style
it at all. Now after the heading I'm
going to add a button and I want this
kind of button. So instead of creating
from scratch, we already have this
button on our homepage uh right here. So
we can just grab this, just copy this
one and paste it right after the
heading.
Make sure this is right after the
heading and inside the container. And
the button will be exactly here. Now
let's uh I'm going to explain you how
it's working. Why this button is all the
way on the right? Because if we select
the container, I already selected the
justify content space between. So
basically, if the space between wasn't
selected, it would be like this, right?
If you make the justify content start,
it will be start. If you make it
centered, it will be centered. If you
choose end, it will be on the end. But
space between makes all the content
inside this container fully apart. It
adds as much space it can between the
items. Okay. So this is really helpful
in the scenarios like this. Okay. Now
let's move ahead. First container is
done. Now I'm going to add another
container by clicking on this container.
Right click and click on add new
container. It will be added here. and go
to the advanced unlink the margin and
just on the top 40 pixel so it adds a
gap between this now I'm going to add a
completely new kind of widget so click
on plus and just search here short code
and this is the short code widget drag
and drop it here
and using the short code we're going to
show some of our products from our
website
Now we need the code here right we need
the short code so to get the code just
go to jifdigital.com
we have come here earlier so if you
scroll down you'll find this product
short code for bestseller so just copy
the whole line from here or click on
this copy to clipboard go back and here
just paste the code after pasting the
code you'll see some products from our
store will be loaded here and if we take
Look at the short code. The product
order is by popularity.
Okay. Now we want to style the product
section just like this. This is you can
see this is styled nicely, right? It has
a background color. It has a nice
layout, right? So let's style our
product section which is currently
looking bad. Now to style the product
section because we are using the short
code. We want to use custom CSS. And to
use custom CSS in the Elementor page
builder free version, there's a trick.
Just click on the plus and search for
HTML. You'll find this widget. And let's
add this widget all the way to the end
like this. And it comes with a
container. We can double click and
rename this custom code just to organize
it. Now from under the widget here we
have to paste the custom CSS and and I
already provided the custom CSS in the
JFD website just and if you scroll down
you'll find these codes. So we're going
to use these codes to style our website
nicely. So first you'll find this
default entire page style CSS. So in
order to add more CSS we must need this
base CSS. Okay. So first I'm going to
copy the whole code from here and go
back. And now here before pasting the
code I'm going to type less than
style greater than and another style tag
will be generated. So basically we're
having a style tag. Now I'm going to
leave some space in between the tags and
inside the space inside of this tag I'm
going to add or paste the copied code.
After pasting, nothing will happen with
the product because for the product
there's a separate CSS code. So, scroll
down and you'll find this product card
style CSS. We need to copy this code. Go
back and we have to paste this code
before the style tag ends. Before the
style. Okay. Uh leave a space here and
uh paste that code. And after pasting,
you'll see this card is having a nice
style.
After pasting the style CSS, currently
this is looking like this. But we can
style this further by customizing our
theme. Customizing our theme that is
controlling the style of this design.
And we'll make the product section look
like this. Okay. Currently, this is
looking like this, but it's okay. So,
our bestseller product is added. Our
product section one is done. Now let's
add another product section which will
be based on featured products. Okay. So
we can just right click on it and
duplicate this thing because the product
section two will be similar. Just we
have to rename this product section two.
And let's change the bestseller to
featured
product
like this. And we have to change the
short code. This was based on
popularity. But let's go to back go back
to the JFT and uh scroll up. You'll find
this product short code for featured
product. Just copy this line and replace
this line with this. It will be based on
featured products. Okay. Now you'll see
the products are changed because this is
based on different categories or
different type of products.
Now, you might be wondering how to make
our products featured in our store,
right? And it's really easy. You just
have to go to the dashboard. Let's
quickly uh see how to do it. So, to go
to the dashboard, click on the
Elementors logo. And from here, click on
the exit to WordPress. I'm just going to
open it on a new tab so we don't lose
this page.
Then, click here. And we'll be in our
dashboard. Now let's go to our products.
So you can make your products featured
by just one click. Click on the star.
And now this product is a featured
product. Click on this star and this
product will be a featured product. It's
that easy. And you don't uh get to
select the popular products because it
is totally up to your customers which
products gets more sales, which products
gets more clicks. Based on that, the
popularity based product will be shown
here. Okay. But of course, the featured
products selection is in your hands.
Okay? So, I'm just going to deselect
this one I showed you as an example. And
I'm going to close the dashboard and go
back to the Elementor. Okay, now let's
continue. Okay, so basically our product
sections are done. But we can see it
actually needs a break point between
these two section. By the way, you can
see uh it's showing two or doubled
products. It's a basic glitch. If you
just go to the front end website and
refresh,
you'll see there's no glitch and it's
showing only one product in a row. Okay,
so it's a glitch. But as I was talking
about, like it needs a gap or another
section between these two sections,
right? Because it's looking too flat.
Like you're scrolling down through the
website and you see this, it's actually
looking bad. So to fix that, I already
have a section template which I'm going
to import. So it's really easy. So in
here, just click on this plus and a gap
will be added here. Now click on the
folder icon. In here, you'll find so
many pro templates, but we're not going
to use pro ones. I have I have a really
nice pro template for you for free. So
go to the templates and if you have
downloaded the resources
you'll have two folders right we have
used the images now go to the second uh
folder which is template in the
templates you'll find this thing this is
called testimonial section dojson now we
have to upload this click on this upload
icon and simply drag and drop this file
here click on continue
and this will be added to the tab
templates. Okay, now we're just going to
click on this insert
and it will be inserted in the element
page builder and this is a testimonial
section where people write about your
products or your website whole
experience. So you can change any
images, any text from here. This is
totally customizable. For example, we
see this text is looking bad as a black
color. So we can go to the style and
make the color fully white. And like
this. Oops, I clicked on the wrong
button. Okay. So just like this, you can
change anything you want from the
background to images to any text.
All right. So now, okay. Now if we
publish and go to our front end website,
refresh.
Now if we scroll down like this, the
transition is looking good. The second
product section is at least one section
apart from the first one, right? It
totally makes sense. All right. Now
let's move ahead and create another nice
section which will be this this nice
services section. Okay. So in here we
can take a new container
and close all other containers from
here. Focus on this. I'm going to double
click on it and rename this services
section. By the way, we can see this
custom code is laying here. So we can
just drag and drop it under every
section. So so it stays separated from
our design. By the way, we cannot see
this custom code. uh same as this in our
front end website. In our front end
website, there's no custom code like
that. Okay. So, it's just for the
building mode. Okay. So, now let's focus
on the services section. First, go to
the advanced tab only the padding on the
right 30 on the left. Now, inside it,
let's add a simple container.
And first make the containers direction
row and justify content space between
and go to the style. We have to add a
color. So click on classic and color.
I'm going to add a code
262 C18 and it will add dark olive
color. It looks really nice. Then I'm
going to go to the advance tab and on
the padding just add 48 pixel on all the
sides. It will add a gap like this.
Okay. Now inside this container, I'm
going to add one more container. And
let's rename this item because more item
will be inside this container. So first
on this item, let's make the width
30%.
And that's it for the item. Now inside
it, let's add a new widget which is
called image box. drag and drop it
inside the container. And image image
box basically adds an image, a heading,
and a paragraph. Okay. So, we're going
to use it in our favor. We're going to
change the image. Click on here. In the
image, you'll find this image. It's
called logistics PNG. Select. It'll be
changed. Now, scroll down. Change the
title heading to this worldwide
delivery. And then finally description
to this. Okay. By the way, if you notice
I have added the BR in here to break the
line here. So now let's go to the style.
So first make the image position left.
Then vertical alignment top. It'll be
shaped like this. Keep the image spacing
15 but image I mean content spacing 8
pixel. Now open the image and make the
width. Select the pixel first.
70 pixel. Then scroll down. Open the
content to edit the typography in here.
I'm going to add a custom typography.
Select here. So the font size will be 20
pixel. And the font family is already
selected. So close. Now for the color,
I'm going to make it fully white color,
which is this. Okay. And then let's edit
the description, which is this. Open the
typography.
Just make the size 18. Family is already
selected. So close. But make the color
fully white. So it'll be looking like
this. I think the typography is little
bigger. This is looking much bigger than
it should be. So we can make the size
16. And it's looking better instantly.
Okay. So I have just added my first item
in the box.
Now instead of creating it from scratch,
I can just select the item, right click
and duplicate. I want three of them. So
duplicating it twice. So I basically get
three items. But I want to change some
things on the item two. First the width
it should be 40%. Then I'm going to open
the style and open the border. I want to
add border. So from the border type,
select the solid and I'll link the
border width and just on the right one
and just on the left one. And let's add
a border color. So I'm going to add this
color code C39074.
But I'm going to drag the second slider
to the right like this. So the color
should be semi-transparent. Not totally
transparent but semi-transparent. Okay.
So altogether this is looking like this
here. But we need to add gaps here and
here. Okay.
So first go to the advanced
the padding on the right 40 on the left
40 pixel. And this is looking like this.
Now we need to add gap here. Select the
third uh third item and un the padding
just on the left 40 pixel and this will
be looking like this. Amazing. Now we
just have to change the text in here. So
let's start with the second one. First
I'm going to uh choose another image for
this. So if you scroll down you'll find
the support or consulting service image.
Select and change the title. It says
live support and change the description
24/7 live support. Click on this one.
Change the image first. Select this.
Change the title to this and description
to this. And overall this is looking
like this. Just perfect. Looking really
cool.
So we are done with our services
section. And now we're going to create
our block section. I'm going to show you
how to do it easily. And we have a
dedicated widget for that. So first
let's add a container and rename this
blogs section.
And we can drag this custom code all the
way to the end.
Okay. So, first thing in the blog, go to
the advanced tab and make the padding
unlin. Then 120,
30,
120,
and 30 pixels. Now, inside the block
section, let's add a simple heading
widget. Change the heading to our latest
blocks. Now just go to the style and
make the alignment center. Apart from
that, we don't have to style the text.
Just go to the advanced and leave some
margin bottom
40 pixel. Now I'm going to add a
completely new widget that is called
blog
posts and this is from elements kit
plug-in we have installed. Okay. So
let's drag and drop it here. And
basically this will add blogs added in
our website. This is showing some stock
blogs or default blogs written. But
later I'm going to show you how to write
blogs for our website. For now let's
work on these uh default or stock blogs
and style this in our homepage. So first
thing under the layout style select the
grid with thumb and the blog list
archive will be changed to this layout.
Then keep everything as it is. Show the
post per row three. Keep everything as
it is but turn off this show content.
Also turn off this read more. So this
button will be gone. I want to show only
the title from the bug. Then other thing
I'm going to show you. So let's open the
query. In the query, make the post count
three. We want to only show three post
from our website. From the select post
by currently this is category, but we
want to select recent post because we're
showing our latest blocks, right? So,
this will be showing the recent posts
and keep everything as it is. Now, open
the meta data. In the meta data, just
keep everything as it is here, but make
the uh meta position after title. And
now let's add meta data from here. Click
on this plus and we can add first date
and the date will be added here the post
date. Then click on plus. Add category.
Category will be added here. By the way,
this is currently unatategorized but it
will be looking like this later when we
create our real blocks. Okay. Then if
you want you can show other things like
author but I think it will be too much
for the card. So I'm just going to
remove the author from here. And that's
it. Now I want to remove all the icons
from items. Like I want to remove the
date icons. So hover over this, click on
the trash icon. It will be removed. Then
from here click on trash icon. All the
icons from the card will be removed and
only the text will stay. Now we're done
with the content. Let's go to the style
and style this card nicely to make it
look like this. Okay.
So first I need to select a background
color. Currently this is deep blue but I
want to make it fully transparent. So
select the transparent option. It will
be gone.
Now scroll down make the container
border radius zero. So it no longer will
have the b rounded border. And also I
want to go to the shadows box shadow and
want to remove the default shadows. So
from the color if we make it fully
transparent the shadow will be just
gone. Then scroll down then make the
container margin zero content padding
zero. Then scroll down open the featured
image make the border radius zero and
padding zero. Then open the meta.
First, I'm going to scroll down and
change the color to fully black so we
can see.
Also, let's open the title first and
make this color fully black. So, we can
at least see the color now and style it.
Now, go back to the meta and let's
change the topography first. The size 4
pixel and the line height 28 pixel.
And here, make everything zero.
Container margin zero, item margin zero,
but item padding unlink it just on the
right. Make it 10 pixels.
Then make the icon spacing zero. Also,
we have the color here. Actually, let's
make the color the text color. So, it'll
be a little bit gray. And finally, make
the border radius zero. Then, open the
title to edit this title here. Open the
title typography. Make the font size 20
pixel and line height 24 pixel. It look
like this. And make the alignment left.
And finally unlink the margin. Margin
top 20 I mean 10 and margin bottom 10.
So overall this is looking like this.
But there is no image right now. You can
see it should be showing the images. But
there is no image. We haven't created
the images or added the images in the
blogs yet. Once we add or create our
blogs, we'll add thumbnails for the blog
and then in our homepage, the images
will be shown nicely. So for now, I've
just styled this blog posts. Later, I'm
going to come back in the homepage and
show you how to add images once we
create our blocks.
So for now, keep it as it is.
So for now, our homepage is fully ready.
We have added all the shake sections and
styled it. It is looking really nice
actually. Let's publish it and see it on
the front end website.
So overall from the banner our website
is looking really gorgeous like this.
We have so many sections. And lastly
we'll fix our blogs of course. Now after
the homepage I'm going to show you how
to create our contact page step by step.
I'll show you the contact page how it
will look. So from my demo website, the
contact page is looking like this. It
will have a nice banner with an image.
Then it will also have a Google map so
you can locate your exact location if
you have. Then here we'll add our
contact details, our social media links,
and also a contact form so customers can
send us messages. Okay, I'm going to
make I'm going to show you how to make
it fully functional. So now let's go
ahead in our dashboard from the element
logo click on the exit to WordPress but
make sure you save it or publish it so
you don't lose the progress.
Okay. So from here click on the
WordPress.
So we're in our pages again.
So we need to create our contact page.
Click on add page.
And here I'm going to rename it contact
and click on publish and publish. And
then let's open the contact page in the
elementtor page builder.
And again we'll have an empty page. Now
we're going to add our contact details.
So first I'm going to add a nice banner
for contact page. So we can take a
simple container and rename this one
page banner. Right now, first in the
page banner, make the main height here
to 56 pixel. Then scroll down, make the
justify content center. Then go to the
advance tab. Make the padding all 30
pixel. Also, I want to go to the style
and add a background image for this
section. So, click on classic and choose
an image from the media. Scroll down.
Let's scroll down and we'll find this
image. This is called image 12 webp.
Select this and it will be it will act
like a background image for this
container. So let's adjust this. This is
looking bad right now. First thing keep
the image resolution full. Then image
position make it center. Then make the
repeat no repeat so the image doesn't
repeat itself. Then finally make the
display size cover. So the image will
cover this container nicely.
Now I want to add a background overlay
exactly like this. You see the in the
background there is image but also an
dark overlay. So how to add that? I'm
going to show you. Open this background
overlay. Then click on classic and add a
color. I'm going to add fully black
color. And you see this will be it's
already showing the uh background
overlay. Now using this opacity we can
control the opacity of the overlay. So
I'm going to make it 0.75
and it'll be like this. Nice. Now let's
add content inside of this banner.
So first thing I'm going to add a simple
heading widget and first change the text
to contact. Now I'm going to make the
HTML tag from here h1. And we already
styled the H1 in the global settings,
right? So let's go to the style. We
don't have to uh edit the typography.
Just make the alignment center. So the
text will be on the center. And of
course change the color to white. So we
can nicely see it. Now it's time to add
this thing in here, this navigation. So
for that I'm going to use a widget that
is called icon list.
Icon list. You will see this. add it
here. And basically, it adds some list
with icon. So, I'm going to close all of
these and open the first one. On the
first one, I'm going to type home and
then remove the icon. We don't need the
icon.
Then, I'm going to uh duplicate the
first one, make it three. Then, on the
middle, add a four slash. Okay. Then on
the last one add
contact. So it will be looking like
this. We're close to make it like this.
Right now if we just make the layout
inline it will be in a row. Nice. Now
let's go to style and first make the
space between 10 pixel. We can control
the space between the items like this.
Just make it 10. And make the align item
center so it becomes on the center.
Okay. Now let's open the text just from
the typography. First make it the
primary and make the size 14 pixel and
line height 28 pixel. Close the
typography and make the color fully
white color. And it'll be looking like
this. Nice.
Okay. Now the banner is done. We're
going to add the Google maps. Now it's
really easy.
So let's take a brand new container in
this box and I'm going to rename it
Google map Google map section
and in the Google map go to the advanced
first I'll make the padding make the top
120 then 30
120 I mean let's make it 30 and lastly
30 okay so space is done now I'm going
to actually add the Google map widget.
Just search for map and you'll see the
Google map widget. Add it here and
instantly you'll see the Google map is
added like this and a random location is
selected. Now you can change the
location to your location.
Just type your location here and that
location will be selected here. You can
set up the zoom how much you want the
zoom.
I want to make it 13. And you can set up
the height here. Let's make the height
500 pixel. So it'll be longer.
Now we want to make it gray shaded.
Okay. So for that let's go to the style
and we have the CSS filters. Open it.
And here if we make the saturation zero
and so it will be gray shaded. Nice. So
this is our location. After that, I'm
going to now add the contact details
like how how to find us, contact number,
exact location, email address, and
social links. Then I'm going to add
forms. Okay. So, we're going to make
this this section now. So, let's take
a fresh new container and call it
contact
section.
So first in the contact section make the
direction row and go to the advanced. I
like the padding on the top 60 30 120
and 30 pixel. Okay. Now inside this
let's add container and make the
container width 50%.
Because we want the first hub 50% like
this then second half also 50%. Okay.
And now let's go to the advanced un the
padding on the right 20 pixel. Now
inside of this container let's add a
simple heading widget and change the
text to how to find us. And make sure
you select the HTML tag too and it'll be
automatically styled. Nothing we have to
do here. Now let's add a text widget. I
mean text editor and change the
paragraph from here. go to the style and
make the text color our text color. Now
we have to style it a little bit. Let's
go to the advanced only the margin on
the top 25 on the bottom 25. Then we
need to control the width of this text.
So from the width select the custom and
we can control the width like this but
I'm going to make it really precise.
Select the pixel and make it 520 pixel.
It'll be looking like this.
Now we'll add these list like this.
Contact number and addresses. So for
that let's use icon list widget from
here. Search icon list. Add it here.
Let's remove all of them. First on the
first one edit and add an number.
Remove the icon.
Then go to this style. Open the text and
open the typography. Just make it 4 in
pixel. That's it. And just make the
color fully black.
Now go to the advanced. Make the margin
10 pixel on the bottom. That's it. Now
we can just duplicate this icon list.
Duplicate. And duplicate one more. And
edit this text to an address. And this
text
to an email address.
Okay. Now after that let's add some
social media links like this. It'll be
useful. So from the plus search for
social icons. You'll find this. Let's
use the basic one. Add it here. This
will add basically social icons. So
first I'm going to remove all of these.
On the first one I'm going to keep the
Facebook icon. But here you can actually
add your social media link. Just go to
your social media. Just go to your
Facebook account and paste that account
link in here. And by clicking on this
icon, it'll take people to your Facebook
account. Okay.
Now let's add Twitter. So just click on
add item. Then from here we can choose
icon library. Click on here. And we got
the Twitter here. You can also search
but we got it here. Actually,
let's make it X because there are no
Twitter anymore. There is X. So, select
it and the icon will be loaded here.
Now, after that, let's add one more and
open. This time, I'm going to select the
YouTube and you can paste the YouTube
channel link in here. Okay. So, now
first make the shape circle. It'll be
like this. Then make the alignment left.
It will be settled on a left. Now go to
the style and let's change the uh color
from official color to custom. And first
on the primary color, select secondary.
It will be like this. And here make the
size 14 pixel. This is the icon size.
And let's make the padding
0.8.
Also make the spacing 10 pixels. And
keep the rows gap zero.
And now let's add some icon hover
colors. So open the icon hover and on
the primary color we can make it uh
primary. So on the hover it'll be
looking like this. Nice.
So basically we have added the lift part
perfectly. This is looking nice. Now
it's time to add the second part which
is the contact form. It will be really
interesting. Let's do it. So I'm going
to close the first container in the
contact section and add a new container
right after that. And also I'm going to
make the width 50% for this one. Now
first thing go to the advanced tab
unlink just on the left make it 20 pixel
so it stays apart 20 pixel with 20 pixel
gap. Now, the first thing I'm going to
add in here is a heading widget and
change the text to ask anything. We
don't have to style it at all. Now,
after this, let's add a text widget.
Text editor. Oops, I placed it on the
wrong place. Undo. Just hit control + Z.
The action will be undone. So, select
that heading. Go to the plus again and
click on the text editor
and change the text to this. Place the
structure on the left side now. So I
want to make this text a little bit
smaller. So go to the style, open the
typography, make the size 14 pixel and
line height, make it em first 1.5 em.
Okay. Now go to the advanced tab and
make the margin just on the top 28
pixel. It'll be apart. And now it's time
to add the actual thing which is this
amazing contact form. And we're going to
use a widget which is called met form.
Add this widget in here after this text.
And it'll say no content is added yet.
So on the left side we have to click on
this edit form and something like this
will show up. Now click on this new and
we have to rename our contact form.
Let's make it contact form one. So make
sure after make sure you select the
general form and make sure you select
the blank template from here. Okay. Then
click on edit form
and a tiny element page builder will
open up and it will open the form
creation place
and on the sidebar we can see the mid
form plug-in is opened with all the
widgets that will help us to build a
contact form. All right. So first thing
we're going to add is a box. So if we
close the mid form the basic layouts
will come up like the container grid and
all. So instead of container this time
I'm going to use the grid. Let's add the
grid here. So grid basically adds a
layout with few boxes like row and
column. By default it's two rows and
three columns. Okay. And the grid will
really help us to make layout like this.
You see in a single row there are two
columns. So let's go ahead. First let's
set up the grid here. Just keep
everything as as it is here. Now scroll
down. And we have the columns three but
we want the uh columns two. And let's
make the rows one. Keep the rows one for
now. And also I want the gaps 30 pixels.
So it will add uh 30 pixel gaps in
between. And that's it for the grid. Now
inside the grid, let's add items. So on
the first uh row and on the first
column, I'm going to add let's open the
midform. Now I'm going to add a text
widget.
So a text widget will come with this
input. So let's turn this input into
this nice your name input. To do that,
first we're going to hide this default
label. So click on here. It will be
hidden. Then on the name instead of this
mfen text I'm going to make it mfen
name. Then on the placeholder instead of
this text which is showing here I'm
going to type your name and scroll down
go to the settings and it should be
required in order to submit a message.
Uh the user must have fulfilled this
name input. Okay. And if you want you
can uh change the warning message if the
user doesn't put the value in in this
field. What should be the warning
message? By default this is this field
is required. I'm going to show you what
it happens. You see if you don't put
anything it'll say this field is
required. Okay. After that let's go
ahead and style this input. So first
thing is skip all of these and open the
input. And first unlink the padding.
Let's resize this input using padding.
So first 12
16 12 and 16 pixel. Then scroll down.
Keep the input color black color. And I
don't want any background on this input
which currently has. So I'm going to
click on background type classic. And
color I'm going to make it fully
transparent. So it won't have any
background anymore. Then scroll down. I
want to add a border. So on the border
type, select solid. And border width,
make it 1 pixel. Then from here, let's
make the border color. I'm going to type
a code. Just add 6D 1 2 3 4 5 6 like
this. And we'll have a nice gray
background. I mean a gray border color.
Then scroll down. Let's edit this
typography a little bit. Let's just make
it 14 pixel. And line height. Choose em
1.4 em. Okay. Close it. Now I'm going to
edit this text. This is under the
placeholder here. So first the
typography should be same but 14 pixel
and the line head should be 1.4 em.
Okay. And also the text color I'm going
to make it our preset text color. So uh
let's click on here and we can see this
text here. Select it and it will be
exactly like this. This is looking like
this right now. Exactly like here. Okay,
we're done with the name. Now we have to
add an email input on this column,
right? So we can click on this plus and
scroll down here. You'll see or just
search for email like this. You'll see
this email from made form MF. Now just
add it here on the second column. The
input will be here. So from here, let's
hide this label. And on this
placeholder, I'm going to just type your
email and put a star like this. It's
showing it's important or required. So
let's go to the setting and make it
required. And for the style, instead of
doing the style from scratch, we can
just copy the first text and paste the
style. not paste. Paste the style on
here and it will adopt the same style as
this one. You see this is cool.
Okay. After this email input, we have to
add this website URL input and it the
midform has dedicated widget for that.
So from here if you search URL, you'll
find this one
just added after this
or just click on it. It will be added on
the second row, first column. And click
on show label to hide it. And in the
placeholder, I'm going to make it uh
your
website. Okay, the input is asking for
the website URL. Okay, now for this one
as well, I'm going to copy the style
from this one and paste the style to
this and it will adopt the same styling.
Now if you see this website URL input is
longer or using the full width unlike
these ones. Okay. So what I'm going to
do with it is go to the advanced tab and
it has a new option which is grid item
and I'm going to make the column span
two from here. So this input alone will
take two column space like this. Okay.
So it'll be longer or using full width.
Okay. So this is done. Now I'm going to
add this thing this message input. So
for that there is also a dedicated
widget which is called this text area.
Add the text area in here. Turn off the
label
and in the message or first on the name
it should be saying mfen
message oops message. And in the
placeholder, I'm going to type message.
Okay. Now, I'm going to copy the style
and paste the style in here. So, it'll
add up the same styling and the same
width.
Now, you can go to the style and control
the height of the text area like this.
So, I'm going to make it 105 pixel. And
overall, it should be looking like this.
Nice.
And now it's time to add the final thing
which is a submit button. It says get in
touch. So we cannot add a simple button
because this is fully functional. So we
got to add this submit button from mid
form. Okay. Add the submit button
somewhere here. It will be added to the
fourth row. I'm having trouble to drag
and drop it here. So we just click on
here and it'll be added here. Okay. So
we have to style it nicely. First it
will say
get in touch and let's make the button
alignment left. Now let's quickly style
this button. Go to the style tab. First
make the uh buttons padding 12
28
12 and 28.
Scroll down. Make the text color white.
Then background type classic and
background color. Let's make it our
accent color. And also scroll down. Open
the border. First of all, remove the
border radius. We don't want that. And
by default, it's also having a shadow.
As you can see, we want to remove the
shadow. So, open the shadow. Open the
box shadow. And from the color, if you
just make it transparent, it will be
hidden. So, we have made our button
perfectly. So, our mid form design is
done. Now, from here, I'm going to click
on publish.
And it's published. And if we just click
on update and close,
the whole form will be added inside of
this container. And looking like this.
Amazing. And now I'm going to quickly
show you how to make that uh form fully
functional. It's actually automatically
functional. You just have to set up
according to your preferences. So from
here I'm going to click on edit form
again. And from here I'm going to choose
the contact form one which which we have
created right now. So click on edit
open.
Then from here on the top click on this
form settings. And we have so many
options but we just to work on a few of
them. So we can first go to the
confirmation. You can turn on this
confirmation mail to user. Turn on this
if you want to send a submission copy to
user by email. You can edit the email
subject. You can uh edit the email from
that which in from which email address
the submission copy will go. For
example, I make the email subject wristy
support
team. So this subject is indicating that
this is from wristy support team. This
is our website name and the email from
let's say it's [email protected].
And if you want you can add any thank
you message. You can write anything you
want here. Okay. Now the most important
thing. Let's go to the notification.
This is notification mail to admin. Turn
this on if you want to send a submission
copy to admin by email. So if any user
sends a message using their name, email,
website address, then the message a
submission copy of all these information
will go to your account or your email
address. So the email subject can be
like wristy customer message.
You'll receive this email and the
subject will be this and this. This is
mail to. So here we have to enter the
email the admin email where you want to
send the mail. For example, you you have
an email address which is this. So the
submission copy or the message and user
sends will be sent to your email
addresses you put here. Okay. You can
add multiple email addresses like add an
email address then put a comma then add
another email address. Okay. So this is
the basic settings you need here and you
should be good here. But if you want to
see an advanced tutorial on just for
form settings, let me know in the
comments. I'm going to make a complete
advanced tutorial for this topic. Okay.
So we're good for now here. So let's
close this popup and click on update and
close. So now our contact form is fully
functional. If any customer sends
message, we will receive the message
through our email addresses.
Nice. Now we basically created our
contact page. Also, we have created our
homepage. But one thing we have missed
is making our whole website responsive.
Let's go back to our homepage. But
before let's publish. So we can actually
open our homepage right from here. Click
on the contact and from here click on
home. And our home will be in the
element page builder. Now this is a
desktop screen, right? So in the desktop
screen, this is looking like this.
Perfect. Nothing to do. But people will
open our website on different screen
sizes like laptop, tablet, mobile. And
as you can see on from the tablet, our
website is started to look really ugly.
Everything is almost messed up. And it's
even messed up on a mobile devices.
You see it's looking really ugly. So we
have to make it fully fully responsive.
And it's actually really easy. It's not
anything hard. We just have to do it.
Okay. So let's open the panel. So this
is desktop mode. But if we go to the
tablet mode, we can see this is not
really bad. Everything is not looking
like bad or something. This is actually
perfect for the laptop mode.
Desktop and laptop is okay. Okay.
But once we go to the tablet mode,
everything start to look really bad. So
let's fix the banner section first. It
will be easy. First, I'm going to open
the banner section and select the
container, first container, and go to
the advanced tab. And I'll link the
padding just on the top. Keep 130 pixel.
It decreased the space in here. Then
let's decrease the font size of this
beak text. So go to the style and make
the size a bit 42 pixel and it'll be
looking perfect.
Now, now let's fix this thing. This is
looking really ugly. So first select
this image, go to the style, make the
height 372 pixel. It will be a little
bit shorter. Then let's select this
button and go to the advanced. And we
can fix the pattern really easily like
this. So put the offset here 210 pixel
and this offset 120 pixel. And it will
be fixed later once we fix all of these.
The height will be adjusted. Now let's
focus on the right side. First of all,
select the second container inside of
this banner section. And if we go to the
advanced tab, we'll see there is so much
high margin here. I mean high padding
here on the left. So first make it zero
and make it 30 pixel. So it'll be
looking like this. Now let's select this
big image which is really having some
height. So let's decrease the height
from here. Just make it 380 pixel. Now
the tablet mode is just looking perfect.
And of course you can just drag these
little images here and there to make it
look perfect. Okay, it's good. Now let's
go to the mobile mode. Okay, by the way,
we can see here this is looking bad like
it's having extra space. We can see
white color here. So select the banner
section and make the width make it
person first. Make the width 100%. So
it'll cover 100% of it. Okay, so the
tablet is perfect. Now let's go to the
mobile mode. And again, everything will
be messed up so much. But the fix will
be really really easy. Just trust me. So
first select the banner section
container and go to this style. First we
have to flip the angle of the gradient.
So here on the angle make it
180 pixel and the location the first
location make it 53. The second location
50 and it will be flipped like this.
Okay. The beige color part would be on
the top and the black color will be on
the bottom. Exactly how we want.
Then we can move this little image
somewhere here. Oops, it's gone here.
So, we have to actually precisely place
it using these sliders. Just put it
somewhere here. It'll stay. Okay. Then
also grab this button. Put it somewhere
here.
or just precisely make the value 210 on
the horizontal and 120 on the vertical.
Make the offset 50% on the top and 120
pixel on the vertical. The button will
be here. Then select the image and make
the height 380 pixel. It will be a
little bit longer. And also select this
uh text editor. And decrease the margin
like make it zero. Zero is also not zero
actually. Let's make it 30 on the
bottom. This looking good. Yes. Now
scroll down. Select this container. The
second container inside the banner.
This one. And remove the left padding.
Make it zero. And this is looking like
this right now. But we have to fix this.
Select this container after the text
editor and go to the layout. And by
default in the mobile mode, it has been
broken into two rows. But if we make the
wrap no wrap, it will be fixed again.
And it will be in a single row. Now the
mobile mode is just perfectly fixed. As
you can see, we have cleverly adjusted
the mobile screen like this. Can you
believe the desktop mode was this
complex? And we have made it through the
laptop, tablet, and the mobile.
This is really good. Okay, now it's time
to fix the next section, which is this.
In the laptop mode, this is looking
perfect, but in the tablet mode, this is
looking like this. And the fix is really
easy actually. So first thing open the
panel and select the category section.
Go to the advanced un the padding. Now
let's decrease on the top 75 then 30 75
and 30 pixel. And now directly going to
select this the container under the
category section first one. Then go to
the advanced only the padding. On the
top keep 60. On the right make it 30. On
the bottom keep zero. And on the left
30. And also let's uh select the text
here. Decrease the font size.
Make it 36 pixel. It'll be perfectly
fixed. And also select this button and
make the font size 18 pixel. And it'll
be perfectly looking fine. But we have
to decrease the image height from here
like this.
Make it this.
And of course we have to select the
container and decrease the main height
from here. We cannot see the decreasing
because the other container is here. So
just make it like this for now. 420
pixel.
And select the second one actually.
I'm going to copy this one and paste
this text style in here. Copy this one.
Okay, don't copy this one because the
color is different.
Just make the font size of this button
18 pixel.
And also select this container.
Make the padding I mean make the min uh
min height 420 pixel. And now we can see
the decreasement of the container.
But I think it has decreased too much.
So let's make it 450 pixel.
And also select this container. Make it
4
50 pixel.
And let's again select the second
container and decrease the padding.
Top 60 right 30 z and 30 pixel. It will
be fixed. But we have to select this
image. Go to the style.
Decrease the image height like this.
Just make it 400 pixel.
And we can see again it's overlaying our
text or heading. So select the heading,
go to the advanced, make the Z-index to
it'll be over that image.
So
the tablet mode is perfectly fixed. But
I want more. I have to decrease the gap
between this.
So we can select the category section in
the layout. Just make the gap on the
column 30 pixel and it will be even
better. And for the mobile mode, the fix
is really easy. It's all almost
automatically fixed. We just have to
decrease the font size. Decrease the
font size
to 29 pixel and this font size to 16
pixel. That's it. Now select this one.
Make the font size 29. This one font
size 16.
And finally select the image. Decrease
the high a little bit like this. And
also select the category section. And no
longer we need the gap on the column.
Make the column gap zero. And make the
row gap 30. So we'll gap we'll add the
gap here. Okay. So now this section is
fully responsive for all the screens.
Perfect.
And for the product section we can see
this is almost fully responsive
automatically. Actually this is
automatically responsive. We don't even
have to do anything. But we can still
fix this thing a little bit here. So
select the container
product section one
decrease the padding 75 on the top then
30
75 and 30 pixel then select this thing
this heading
margin bottom only 10 pixel
and we can decrease the font size a
little bit like make it 36 and this
buttons font size
make it 16 pixel and everything is
perfectly fine and we'll fix these on
the customization as we know. Okay. And
this testimonial section is already
automatically responsive because we have
imported this section. Okay. Now do the
same for this product two section.
Select the section product two section.
Decrease the padding on the top. 75 30
75 30 and this heading make it 36. And
this go to the advanced margin bottom
10. And select this
decrease the size 16 pixel. Okay. Now
this is looking perfect in the mobile
mode.
Now we have this section here. This will
be easy to fix. So first in the laptop
mode we just have to decrease the text
sizes and all. So from the style go to
the content, open the typography and
decrease it to 18 pixel close it open
the description typography decrease it
to 14 pixel. Close it and just copy the
item and paste the style and paste the
style. it will be automatically fixed.
But this is looking bad here. So we can
decrease the padding a little bit here.
Go to the advanced only the padding.
Make it 20 pixel. So the padding will be
like this. Okay. It'll be fixed.
Perfect. For the tablet uh laptop mode.
Now in the tablet mode this is looking
like this. All you got to do is again
fix it. Now select this container under
the services section and decrease the
padding to 30 pixel. And now let's
select the image box again. Open the
content. Decrease the typography. Make
it 16. And make the description size 12.
Now copy and paste the style here. Copy
and paste the style here. Now what I can
do here is select the uh second item.
Decrease the padding here.
to 20 pixel on each side.
And what we can do is actually remove
the border. The border is making it
looking bad. So go to the style, open
the border and make the border width
zero for the mobile mode and it will be
just fixed.
Okay. Now for the mobile mode, this is
this will be so easy. It's all
automatically fixed as you can see by
making it column. But we have to add
some gaps between the items. So select
this container parent container of this
uh single items. Go to the layout and if
we make the gaps 20 pixel it will be
fixed. Actually let's make it 30 pixel.
Okay. And now if you want you can also
bring back the border on the second
item. Make the unlink the border. Make
the border one, I mean border top one
and border bottom one. The borders are
back. We can also add padding. Go to
advanced. Instead of padding left and
right, add padding top and bottom. And
it'll be perfect like this.
And also on here we have uh this padding
over here. So just make it zero. It'll
be centered. Perfect. Now we have our
last section which is our block section
as we cannot see any images or anything.
We cannot see that this is automatically
fully responsive once the image is
added. Once we create our blocks page
we'll be able to see it will be fully
responsive automatically. Okay. So
basically our homepage is fully
responsive for uh laptop mode, tablet
mode and mobile mode. Perfect. Now let's
go ahead and quickly uh responsive our
contact section or contact page. It'll
be easy because it doesn't have so many
uh sections, right? So first I'm going
to select the banner page and let's see
how it looking on the laptop. It's
looking perfect on the laptop. It's
looking almost perfect on the tablet
mode. Just we have to go to the style
and decrease the main height. Make it
190 and select this heading. And let's
decrease the font size a little bit like
make it 47 pixel. That's looking
perfect.
Now let's select the Google map section
and decrease the padding margin uh
padding top 75 and bottom. Just keep it
as it is. This is looking good. Now this
is this area is already responsive. So
uh I'm going to select the contact
section
and remove the padding and just on the
top let's make it 75 pixel and it'll be
just perfect.
Now in the mobile mode it will be
automatically fixed almost. We just have
to uh fix some things like adding space
in here. We can simply select this first
container on the bottom. We can add 30
pixel and it should add a gap. Then
select the second container.
Remove the padding left from here. And
now we have to fix this form. Let's go
inside the form. Open the form in here.
And inside the form element as well,
switch to mobile mode. And this is
looking like this. Now I'm going to
select this uh text first. Go to the
advanced and make the column span two.
So it takes full space as you see. And
select the email. Then do the same
column span two.
And finally the this button. Let's do
the same. Make the column span two. So
it takes full space.
And also with this button what I'm going
to do is make the button alignment
justified. So it'll be full like this.
Okay. Now click on publish
and update and close. Now in the mobile
mode this is looking just perfect. Our
contact is looking perfect.
Nice.
So we can say our whole website is okay.
So here I want to do one last thing. I'm
going to select the Google maps and
decrease the height a little bit like
this.
Just make it 400 pixel and it's perfect.
So you can say our contact page is fully
perfect. Our whole website is uh fully
responsive and perfect. And now before I
start customizing our header, footer and
the shop pages, I'm going to show you
how to create blogs for your website.
For that, let's go back to our
dashboard.
Then click on this WordPress icon and
we'll be in our dashboard again. Now to
create blogs for our website, we have to
go to the posts option. Click on here
and we're having some random blog posts.
So what I'm going to do is select all of
the blogs including this default one
from the bulk action. Click on move to
trash and apply. All will be deleted.
And I'm going to show you how to create
a blog from scratch fully freshly. So
from here, click on add post. And this
is the blog creation area. This is
almost looking like the page creation.
But in here we can add a blog title
like this. This is a title for my blog.
Now in this area we can type any text we
want.
And this is a fully rich text editor
means we can select any portion of the
text and make it stylized like make it
bold, make it itallic, even make it a
link. And it also has a widget option.
It has so many widgets. Just click on
this plus and you'll see it has so many
many kind of widget like paragraph,
heading, code, verse, images, gallery,
audio, video. Then here we have this
calendar, social icons. Literally
anything you can imagine in a blog. It
has all. Then if we go to the patterns,
it has so many pre-built presets. Like
in the banners, you can grab any design
just by dragging and dropping here. Then
from the blocks, let's say I want to add
an image in here. Just drag and drop the
image widget here. Click on this upload
or select media library. Add any image
you want and the image will be added
here. Then you can resize the image any
how you want like this. So overall, this
is a complete blog builder. And now I'm
just going to delete all the examples
tab and add my own written blogs.
Okay, I have deleted. Now I'm going to
add my blog.
Okay, I have added this blog with this
image in here. Now I can close this
widget option and open this sidebar from
the right side. Now in here we have some
options like text. You can change the
text color, background color, then
default font size. But I prefer this
default thing. This is good enough. Now
if we switch to the post, we have other
options really important options like
set featured image which is thumbnail
for the post. So you can click on here
and scroll down. I select this one as a
thumbnail of this whole blog post. Then
we have all this metadata status,
publish, slug, author name. As you can
see, this is my author name. You can
change it from the dashboard. I earlier
showed you how to do that. After that,
we have the categories tags. We can add
new category like trending
watches.
Type here and click enter to add as a
category. it'll be selected. Then you
can add tags like women's watch
trendy
like this. This is almost like creating
a product, right? So after giving enough
informations for my blog, I'm going to
click on this publish and publish again
and my first blog for the website will
be published. Now we can click on this
view post and this will take us to the
single blog post where I can read the
whole blog with all the information and
details and also if anyone wants they
can actually leave message or feedback
for this blog post
just like this. And as an admin, you
have total control of any comments
people do in the blog posts. Like if you
go to the dashboard, go back to the
dashboard. If you go to the comments
from the left side, you'll see all the
comments people going to do on the blog
post. Also, you can uh view the reviews
on products in the same place as the
comments. So from here, you can
unapprove this or delete that if you
want. and the review or the comment will
be deleted. Okay, so this is our blog
single blog post. This is looking like
this for now. But of course, we're going
to customize it to make it look even
better. But now we have to build a blog
page, a dedicated page for the blog
lists. So now I'm going to go back to
the blogs or the posts. Currently we're
having only one post you can see but I'm
going to quickly come back after adding
more post like this. The creation the
post creation is exactly same I have
showed you. So without wasting time I'm
going to add some blocks and come back.
Okay I have add all the blog post for my
website. Now our website will be
fulfilled with blocks. All right. Now we
need to create a dedicated blog page
where we can show the blog lists all the
blog lists right so for that let's just
go to the pages
and create a new page click on add new
page
name it blog oops
blog publish publish
and now we have to tell our WordPress
that this is our official blog page
page. So for that scroll down on the
left side and under the settings just go
to the reading and just like we have
selected homepage or home as a homepage
select the blog page as a posts page.
Okay. Then click on save changes. Now
let's go to our front end website. Now
from here after our domain name if we
type forward slash blogs
and we can see here our blog page where
all the posts are shown in list like
this. Although this is looking like this
looking actually bad but in the
customization we'll customize our blogs
page really nicely. Okay, now it's time
to do the really important thing which
is customizing our header and the
footer.
Because in the header we really really
need our menus. So we can navigate
through our pages. We need links like
home, about, contact, shop, blogs, all
the links on the header. Right? So for
that we have to create menus. To create
menus go to the dashboard
and from the left side under the
appearance you'll find this menus
option.
Okay. So here first we have to rename
our menu. I'm renaming it main menu and
click on create menu.
But before that you can select this
primary menu and click on create menu.
Now we have to add links to our main
menu. So from the left side click on
this view all. And we can see all of our
pages like home, blogs, cart, checkout,
contact, shop, all of these. So first
I'm going to select home then blogs
contact shop
and we can also select wish list since
the wish list is not in the header but
we have my account and cart on the uh
header already so I'm not selecting
those
just select home blogs contact
shop and wish list now click on this add
to menu
and this will be added to menu. Now from
here we can drag and drop and reorder
the links. So I'm going to put the shop
page right after the homepage. Uh home
shop blogs then
maybe wishlist and then after contact at
the end contact. Okay. Now this way I'm
going to save the menu.
Now after saving the menu if we go to
our front end website and refresh
we can see the menus are automatically
added. This is looking like this. But of
course in the customization we can
customize it perfectly.
So overall we can click on this my
e-commerce website
and it basically takes us to the
homepage. So it basically looking like
this. Now I'm going to show you how to
fully customize our website from the
header to footer then blogs to shop
pages. And to start customizing we can
go to our dashboard from here from under
the appearance we can click on customize
and the customizing interface will come
up here.
So here we have so many customization
option but each of them are super easy
to do. First we can go to the site
identity. In here we can select our
official logo for the website. Then if
we scroll down here we can select the
site icon. The site icon is basically
the icon which shows with the tab.
Right? Just like in the gym digital is
showing the site icon this now we can
select our own side icon. But before
that let's select our logo. Click on the
select logo. So from our media library
let's look for the logo. So I got the
logo here wristy and click on select and
from here click on skip cropping. I want
the whole logo shown here and here the
logo will be set. And if you want you
can select higher resolution uh logo for
retina displays or mobile logo smaller
logos or images for the mobile devices
but I'm totally okay with this. So now
let's go ahead and select a site icon.
So in the media, I'm just going to
upload my own fab icon or side icon and
just select it without cropping. Skip
cropping. And you see instantly our tab
icon has been changed to this W. Now we
can click on publish. And we're done
with our site identity. So let's go
back. Now we can go to the layout. The
layout there is so many option but we
don't have to do much. First we can go
to the site uh container and make sure
the width is 1240 pixel like this and
keep the background color white. Keep
the background image uh default and just
publish. Keep everything default and
publish. Go back. We can go to top bar
actually keep just just keep everything
default. skipping all of these, we can
just directly go to the blog and let's
also go to the blogs page and we can see
the layout here. So the layout is
currently selected as this but I want it
to be like the first layout. Now I think
this is looking much much better. So
this is our blogs list page. Now we'll
uh add some widgets on the sidebar in
here. Don't worry about this. Now here
you can tweak the things like the blog
list structure first. There is featured
image which is this. Then there is title
which is this. You can just tweak it
like reorder it if you want. You can put
the meta data before the title. I think
this looks even better. So I'm going to
keep it like this. Now publish. Let's go
back. Now let's go to the single blog.
In the single blog let's open a blog to
see. So first I'm going to put the meta
data before the featured image. So all
the date and author names then
categories will be before the cate I
mean featured image. And here also if
you want you can hide the featured image
if you think the image is looking really
big unnecessarily big. So I'm actually
going to hide the featured image from
here. Just keeping the single block.
Okay. Publish. Now let's go back. Now we
have the sidebar here. So you can decide
where you put the sidebar. So from the
right side, I'm going to make it left
side. I want my sidebar to be on the
left side in the single blog or whole
the in the whole blog. Let's go to the
blog and see. You see in the blogs as
well the sidebar is on the left side.
And you can also decide in the blog list
whether there is sidebar or no sidebar.
If you select no sidebar, the sidebar
will be gone from here. Or if you want
to select the right side in only blog
list, the sidebar will be on the right
side. I think it it's looking better on
the right side for the blog list. It's
making the page fulfilled, right after
we have the shop product archive. So you
can decide on the shop page. Let's go to
the shop page. And we can see there is
also a sidebar. You can decide where you
want to show the sidebar for the uh shop
or product archive page. So this is by
default on the left side. I'm keeping it
on the left side. Then here on the shop
single, let's uh open the shop single.
This is called a shop single. So by
default there is no sidebar in the shop
uh single. But if you want you can add a
sidebar like this. But I actually prefer
no sidebar in the single shop or product
page. Okay, let's go back.
Now we have the footer. In the footer,
we almost have nothing in the footer
except of this copyright text. But in
the widgets column, I'm going to select
three.
So in the footer, there will be space
left to add widgets or elements in the
footer. Just like this. You see actually
here 1 2 3 four column is there. So I'm
going to make it make the widget columns
four. So we can add four columns for
items.
And also from here you can change the
copyright text like this is right now
saying copyright 2025 my e-commerce
website. You can't uh change the text
from here but I do not recommend to
change these things. This is fully
functional. It says current year. If
it's current year, it will show the
current year in here converted. And this
is if this is site title, it will show
the site title in here. But of course,
you can change this from here. But
instead of changing it from here, I'm
going to change the site title directly
from somewhere else. Okay. But on the
part by here, I'm going to type rristie
my website name. Or we can just remove
the whole powered by thing
like this. And later we'll change the my
e-commerce website text to our website
name. Okay. Now publish. Go back. Now we
have this scroll to top button, right?
By clicking on it, it takes us on all
the way to the top of the page. So you
can little bit customize that as well.
So in the design you can
change the background color to any color
I guess like this. So I'm going to add
my accent color which is the secondary
we have created in the global settings
right or select the accent color. So it
will be changed to this nice you can
change the icon size
border radius of this and offset bottom
like this. I'm going to keep it
somewhere here. Okay. Okay. Now, let's
go back
and it's enough for the layout, I guess.
Now, going back from the layout. Now,
you can go to the colors. In the colors,
we just have to change the uh main
colors in here. Four colors. Right now,
everything is looking blue, gray, black,
and blue, right? like from buttons to
hover effects on the menus everything is
based on these four colors. So I'm going
to click on here and add my own theme
colors. So first on the theme color I'm
going to make it this color
and you'll see the hover effect on the
or active effect on the page links will
be changed. Nice. Then let's change the
text color. Add this color for the text.
And then link or accent color.
Let's make it this color. And finally
link hover color. Change it to
this color. Okay.
So many color has been changed but this
color hasn't changed yet. The button
one. But the button color option is
somewhere else. I'm going to show you
later. But everything else's color has
been changed to our own color. Nice. You
see? All right. Now publish and go back
from the color.
Now we have this buttons. So in the
buttons we can change the background
color now. So I'm going to select this
theme color. This is called theme color.
And the button color will be changed to
this or you can change it to this. I'm
going to keep it this. Okay.
Then you can uh select the border
radius. I'm going to actually make it
zero as our homepage design makes all
the buttons border radius zero. Now it's
good. Now let's go back.
Then we have the typography. In the
typography, make sure every font you
select is either Helvetica
like this. Then go back,
open the primary menu. Primary menu
color should be our own
Marcela's font family. And you'll see
this will be changed.
Right? This looking much much better.
And we can of course tweak the uh font
size here. So I'm going to make it 16
pixel. It'll be a little bit bigger.
Then we can make the line height a
little bit smaller like 20 pixel. So the
header the whole header would be a
little bit shorter. Okay. Looking nice.
Now here we can make the sub menu size
14. Later I'm going to show you how to
add sub menus. Okay. Now publish and go
back.
Now we have the heading. In the heading
again choose the Marcelus
and here make the line height 1.2.
Then here the rest keep everything as it
is. Okay. Now publish and go back. We're
done with the typography. Every text is
looking good. Now it's time to go to the
oocommerce.
So first I'm going to go to the product
catalog and you'll see it'll take us
here. So just keep everything as it is
default
and but make sure you make the product
per row three. So it'll show three
products per row. But you can of course
change it to four and four product will
be shown like this. But I prefer three
product per row.
And you also able to select the product
per page. Currently this is 12. So 12
products is showing in a single page. If
you want you can make it eight.
And now if we go to the shop page in the
front end website,
we can see only eight product been
showing here and the rest of the product
is in the second page
like this. Okay. So let's go back to the
customization
and we're good with the product catalog.
Now we can go to the product images.
Actually in the product images keep
everything as it is. all the ratio, all
the thumbnail width and all. Just keep
everything as it is because everything
is looking good. Now we can go to the
sharp archive which is this page and
here in the general make sure every
every option is selected shop title
breadcrumb result count product
filtering and turn this out of stock
product button off. Then we can open the
product card and keep the border style
none.
And we can open the product content and
make it left.
And you'll see all the product content
will be settled on the left.
Now in here, turn on the product title.
Turn off the product category. If you
turn it on, the product category also
will be shown like this. But I think
it's too much for the product archive.
So turn this off. Just turn on the
product rating. The rating is not there
yet because the product hasn't been
rated yet. Then show the product
pricing, turn up the product quantity
and equal product content. Okay. Now we
can go to the product image and you can
uh select the kind of animation when you
hover over any product. Like currently
if you hover over on it, it swaps the
image into a gall gallery image. But if
you want you can select it, zoom and
publish. And now if you see on hover the
product will just zoom. Actually I
prefer this one better
more. So I'm keeping the zoom effect.
Now we can make the equal image height.
Actually it's better if you have
different ratios of image. You can turn
this on. So the image all the image
height will be equal. And let's make the
image height 320 pixel. It will be a
little bit longer. Okay. Now we have the
sale tag. Sale tag is this. How much
discount is you are getting on this
product which is on the left side. And
you can also change the text. Like if I
turn off this sale percentage, you'll
just say sale sale. And you can say
change the sale text, but I prefer the
sale percentage shown here. Now, let's
uh change the background color of the
sale tag. Click on here, and I'm going
to choose the secondary. It's looking
nice. Now, scroll down. We can open the
wish list button. So, it setups where
the wish list you want to show. Like
right now, the wish list is on the top
right. I think it's the good place to
keep the wish list. So I'm going to keep
as it is. Now this is add to cardart
button. This is important because this
is looking like this really bad right
now. We have to fix it. We can choose
from many uh add to cutart button style.
Like if you choose this add to cut
button will be always shown like this.
But now this is hidden and by hovering
you can see the add to cardart. Actually
this is better. But I'm going to
customize it further to make it look
really good. Okay. So I'm just going to
keep it the second one, the hidden one.
It will be always hidden but on hover it
will be shown but it will be nice later.
And here you can turn on or turn off the
card icon which is this. I'm going to
turn it on. Now this is enough for the
what is called this shop archive. So I'm
going to publish. Let's go back. And
this is now single product. Let's go to
a single product.
Okay. So here make everything turned on
all of these options. Then open the
product images. So this is the layout of
the gallery. Actually let's open another
uh product with gallery enabled. I think
this has gallery.
Yes, this is having gallery. So you can
change the style of the gallery shown
here. So this is one style. This is one
style
like this. And this is another style.
But you know what? I actually love the
first one. So I'm keeping uh keeping the
layout of the gallery first one.
Currently this is here the sale button
and the wish list button has messed up.
I'm going to really quickly fix it
later. For now, just keep it. Now scroll
down. If you open the product data tabs,
you can reorder the data tab which is
here. If I move down the description on
the middle, the description will be on
the middle and first the additional
information will be shown. But I prefer
the description to be first.
If you want, you can also add tabs like
this custom tab. In the custom tab in
here, there are so many options. You can
write text, add any description as well.
Okay, but I'm going to delete it. I
don't know. I we don't need any
additional tabs here. Now, this is
related products. In the related
products, you can decide how many
columns you want to uh show. I'm going
to select as three. And total products.
I'm going to show three products total.
Then you can go to the recently viewed
products. I'm going to turn on display.
If you have any products you recently
viewed, it will be displayed here.
Recently viewed products. And total
products, I'm going to show three. Then
finally, we have add to cart button for
add to cart. This. So from here as well,
we can customly design the button style
like adding background color, adding
color, border radius. But we already set
up this so it's good. Now publish and go
back from the single product. Now comes
the cart page here. So our cart page is
currently missing from here. So we can
add a product to cart to open the cart
page. Later I'm going to add a menu for
the cart page right here. So currently
the cart page is looking like this but
you can change the layout to this. And
this is also a good looking layout.
Let's compare both. This is looking like
this. And this is looking like this.
Almost similar, but I think the first
one is looking better.
Okay. So, let's keep it this.
Now, go back.
And finally, you have the mini cart. The
mini cart is this. Let's go to the shop.
Add a product to the cart.
So, mini cart comes up when you click on
add to cart.
So this is the mini card. We can barely
see it right now, but you can go to
general and change the empty card
message, which is currently no products
in the cart. You can change it if you
want.
So that's that. Now let's go back.
Let's go back from the oocommerce. We're
done with this. Now we can go to the
menus to create menus for our footer.
Right? So currently we have already the
main menu we have created from the
dashboard. If you want, you can create
the footer menu from the dashboard, but
I'm going to show you how to create the
menus right from here. So, click create
new menu. From here, I'm going to name
it footer menu one.
And click on next.
And in the footer menu one, let's add
items.
So, first I'm going to add homepage,
contact page, and shop page. So, this is
footer menu one. From here, let's add
one more menu. Go back from the menu
one. Click on create new menu. This one
will be footer menu 2. Click on next.
Add items.
In here, we'll add maybe the my account
page, then wish list, then cart page,
and the dashboard. Okay. So, I have
created two footer menus. Now from the
main menu I want to edit this a little
bit. Let's add an item. From here I want
to add card button. So by clicking on
the card it shows the mini cart or go to
the cart page. Okay. Now publish. Go
back from the main menu. Go back from
here. And now we're going to go to the
widgets. In the widgets there are so
many options. So first in the commerce
sidebar. This is the oocommerce sidebar.
Okay. So in here we can add items. Let's
click on block and from here I'm going
to search search and you'll see this
product search option. Click on here and
this product search will be added and it
will look like this in here. Then click
on plus again this time search
filter and you'll see the product
filters addit and it will be looking
like this. We'll customize it nicely.
Then after that click on plus again and
this time search price category and
you'll see this categories list addit
and it'll be added here. Now all of
these looking like this really ugly but
we're going to fix it really easily.
Before we fix it let's publish and go
back and finish our widgets. So go to
the footer footer widgets. In the footer
widgets, first I want to add an image.
So let's click on this image and as the
image I'm going to choose our own logo
image. So this
now click on the plus and add paragraph.
Add the paragraph right here. Then after
that you'll find
social
icons. You'll see this. Add this. So
from here add uh plus
first let's search Facebook add the
Facebook then add YouTube
and then add X.
It'll be like this.
Now this time we'll add one thing that
is called navigation menu. You'll see
this navigation menu here. Just add it.
And on the title I'm going to type links
and I'm going to select the footer menu
one. So the footer menu one will be
selected here. Then let's add one more
navigation menu.
And as a title I'm going to type shops
and select footer menu 2. And it will be
loaded like this. Although this is
looking like this. Uh we're going to fix
it. Let's finish the uh adding stuff
here. So from here I'm going to add one
more step which will be a column. Click
on this columns. Click on the first
column which is 100. And within this
column click on this plus and search for
heading. Add this heading. I'm going to
make it contact us. Then after this
click on this three dots option. Then
click on add after. So it will add
content right after this within this
column and click here and search for
list. You'll find this one list. Then in
here add a number. Then I'm going to
click on option and duplicate. Then
duplicate one more time. Then on the
second one I'm going to add an email
address. Then finally an address like
this. So here this will be looking like
this. Okay. Now we're done adding the
items. Now we're going to fix this
thing. It should be looking like this.
Right? First the logo on the same column
the paragraph and on the same column
some social icons.
So from here I'm actually going to
delete this. From here scroll down
delete. From here select the paragraph
delete. And select this one and delete.
Oops. Select the whole thing and delete.
Okay. Now click on here on the
navigation menu. Click on the options
and click on add before. So uh block
will be added before this thing. Okay.
So in here click on the plus and this
time select column and select the 100%
column. Then click on the plus in the
column and this time add image. Now
again let's uh media library. Let's
select the logo we have
after the logo. Select the logo like
this. Click on the uh three dots. Then
click on add after. Then add the
paragraph. Click on the blog. Search for
paragraph and add the paragraph here
like this. Then select the paragraph.
Click on three dots and click add. after
click on the plus then click on social
icons and click on this plus here and as
a social icon I'm going to add Facebook
then add X then add YouTube and we can
add one more like
so the icons are looking like this but
within the icon we can click on the
icons and add the real social links but
for now I'm going to put hash so it
enables the icon. So just click on the
icon and put hash if you don't have the
link ready yet. Just putting the hash so
it is showing in the footer, right? So
click on the LinkedIn lastly put the
hash and it will be showing here. Now I
want to change the style of the social
icons. I want to make it
exactly like this. For that select this
whole social icon widget and from the
three dots select show more settings and
you will see all of these. From here
click on this option style and select
the logos only. Now the social icon will
be looking like this. And from the icon
color you can choose this color
and the icon will have this black color
in the footer. looking really nice now.
Now our footer is looking ready. As you
can see, everything is in a column and
we have all together four columns.
This is also fully responsive in the
tablet mode and mobile mode. Perfect.
So our footer is actually ready. So we
can go back from our footer widgets. And
we already did set up the WooCommerce
sidebar which is looking like this right
now. But now I'm going to add some
custom CSS to make it look perfect and
the products will look perfect too. So
from the additional CSS open it and in
the field we can actually add custom CSS
we have added before in our homepage. So
to get the CSS code, just go to
jinfjutoal.com.
And here you'll find the default entire
page style CSS. First, copy it and paste
the CSS code here.
After adding it, go back there again and
scroll down and copy this product card
style CSS.
Then in here, add some space and paste
it too. And you'll see the products will
be colored like this. This is looking
really good. Now, now we have some more
style CSS to fix these right here. So,
go back and you'll have shop page filter
CSS style. Copy this one and paste the
CSS code in here. Then go back again.
Select this single product page style
CSS.
add the CSS code
in here. It'll fix some things in the
single shop.
Then this is product card style CSS
classes. We don't need it. And finally,
we have the blog post style CSS. This is
for just for homepage, so we'll add it
later. And we'll want to copy this one.
Blog page style CSS.
Add it. And if we now go to the blocks
page,
some extra things are gone from here
after adding the CSS. But you see the
sidebar here. We'll fix the sidebar
later here from the widgets. Okay. Now
we have the single blog post style CSS.
Copy this and add the code here.
And if we open the single style CSS, I
mean single blog post. It's fixed. The
text are fixed. Text sizes are fixed.
So, we're good here. Now, we'll actually
fix the blogs sidebar. Okay, these. So,
go back from the customization and go to
the widgets and you'll see the main
sidebar which is actually referring to
this. So, we can add widgets like
search. Add this search and the search
will be added here. Then we can add
widgets like categories. Select
categories list and it'll show all the
blocks categories list. Then if you want
you can search tags. Actually there's no
tags.
And you can add any widget you want in
the blocks page. Okay. I'm just going to
keep it as it is for now. So go back.
Now I'm going to actually go ahead and
fix the shop page.
So we need to go back to this widgets
again and open the oocommerce sidebar
and in here we have to select this uh
search option. Then click on this three
dots and click on show more settings.
And we'll have so so many settings here.
First of all click on use button with
icon and the search uh we'll use only
the icon not the text. Okay
just like in here. Then
go to the styles and we have the color
first text. Click on here. Select the
white color. So the icon color will be
white. Then icon background. I'm going
to select this accent one. And it will
be looking like this. And also we have
the font size. Instead of the default,
let's make a custom one.
Click on here. Set custom. Make it 16
pixel. It'll be a little bit bigger. And
once we close the side panel, it'll be
looking like this. Okay.
And the rest is good for the search
button or search widget. So let's go
back and next we have to delete this
filter. This filter text is looking bad
here. This is unnecessary. So just
remove the text like this. Okay. Now
let's select the price filter here.
Scroll down. This is this. Now click on
here three dot. Click on show more
settings.
Actually select this this whole thing.
Now click on show more settings and
first uh turn off this show input
fields. So it'll remove the fields and
show only the numbers. Then let's go to
the style and make all the color this uh
orange color. So every slider and knob
color will be this accent color looking
nice
and the search text is looking bad here.
We can go back, delete this search text.
We don't want the label because it's
already saying search products in here.
We don't want to add any label. Okay. So
everything is looking perfect now. The
sidebar is perfect for the shop. Now we
can click on publish.
And if we close it, close the whole
customization uh sidebar.
Now our whole website is looking like
this. This is our homepage. This is
already perfect. But we can see the
blogs here are looking really bad. We
have to fix it. So we can click on edit
with Elementor.
And we need to add this code which is
blog post tile CSS for homepage. We have
to copy this code and in the homepages
custom CSS code here inside the style
tag we can add this like this and then
we have to go back here and we have this
blog post style CSS class we have to
copy this one blog post and go back and
select this blog blog post in here we
have to add the CSS class name inside
CSS classes if we add it it will be
perfectly
fixed with same height. Perfect. Now
publish. Now let's go back to our front
end website.
Just type our domain name
to go to the home. Now let's go to the
shop. How it's looking?
This is looking like this. Super
perfect.
Now if we go to a in a single website or
single product.
Okay. So even after adding some custom
CSS in the customization, we can see in
our single shop page, this part is still
conflicted the design. But we can fix it
really easily. We can uh put this wish
list button or this her button right
here. For that we have to go to the
dashboard.
From here you'll find this AMC wish
list. Click on here. And if you uh see
the guided setup just skip all of them
and you'll be here. Then from here under
the style click on this wish list style
button style
and scroll down you'll see this add to
wishlist button on single product page
which is this page and this button. So
currently this is on the left side the
button position on the top left side
but instead of this I'm going to select
on image top right side. Okay, after
selecting, click on save settings. Then
go back to the single product and
refresh. And you'll see the button will
be here. Perfect. Now, one more thing in
the page. I want to change this gray
color from the product. I want it to be
fully white color like this. So, for
that, it's really easy. Click on the
customization again and click on the
oocommerce. Open the single uh product
single. Then open the general. If you
scroll down, you'll find this content
background. Click on this color and
select fully white color. The code will
be 6F.
Now this will be looking even better.
Close the customization.
Now the page is looking much much
better. So everything is looking perfect
in the uh product single. Now let's go
to the blogs.
So the blog list are looking like this
which I actually don't like at all. So I
rather make it like the homepage. In the
homepage blogs are looking really good.
So from the customize let's quickly fix
it. Now from the layout go to the blog
and make the blog layout this this grid
one. It will be grid but the sidebar is
messing up. So actually I don't want the
sidebar. So from uh here go back open
the sidebar
and on the blog list instead of right
sidebar I'm going to select no sidebar
and for the blog single as well I'm
going to select no sidebar and it will
be looking like this looking actually
much much better than before. If we open
the single blog post
the sidebar will be gone too and we can
enjoy the full blog in the full screen
like this. Perfect. Now let's publish
and close. So the blogs is perfect. Now
we can go to the wish list. We're
actually polishing the whole website. We
are checking the whole website and pages
to polish it. So wish list looks so much
polished. Good enough. It's already
polished. Nothing to do. So then let's
go to the contact.
So the contact page is perfect on in
terms of design but it doesn't have the
full width. It's not having the full
width for the page. So we can fix it
really really easily. Just open the
element. Open the page with the element.
Now from here click on the page
settings. Scroll down and instead of
page layout default make it element full
width
and the contact page will have its full
width. Perfect. Now publish.
and go back.
So the contact page is fully perfect.
Now we can go to the cart page.
So the cart page is having a default
card style, right? But I want to make
the card style look like this in my
targeted website like this. Okay.
So we can go to the dashboard and do it.
Go to the dashboards pages.
and open the cart page. And in the cart,
we can see there's a default uh cart
widget which are holding all of these
default stuff. So, we can select all of
them like this. And from here, just
delete everything.
Now, we have to add a short code. Click
on here and search for short code.
You'll see this. And we need to add the
short code here. To find the short code,
it's really easy. Just Google
Woo Commerce
short codes. Search this. Just scroll
down. You'll find this short codes
included with WooCommerce documentation.
Just open this. Scroll down. Scroll
down. And you'll find this WooCommerce
short codes. You'll see the whole list.
So first we need we need this first one
displays the card. So this is the simple
short code. We have to copy and paste it
inside this cart pages short code. After
adding click save. And now if we go to
our uh cart page and refresh
this will be looking like this. How nice
it's looking our now it's looking like
our website. This is using our global
fonts, global font styles, text colors
all of them. So this is looking like our
theme color. Okay. Now similarly we can
fix the checkout page. Click on the
proceed to check out to see it.
This is by default. By default the
checkout page looks like this. So we can
go back from here.
And in the pages we can open the
checkout page.
And we can see the default checkout
widget which we can select like this and
delete instead
click on here and search short code.
Oops.
And we can get the short code right from
here. Uh the second one says displays
the checkout page. Copy this short code
and add it here. Click on save. And now
we if we refresh the checkout page, this
is looking like this. Super amazing.
Definitely better than before. Way
better.
Okay. So our check out page is perfect.
Now if you want
you can also open the my account page
and if you see there is already short
code then it's okay. If you don't see
the short code add the short code widget
and copy this WooCommerce my account
short code. Add it here. It'll be
perfect.
Okay. So, this is our whole website
overall. It's looking like this. Just
perfect. By the way, on the search, we
can search for the product here. Just
search anything
and the products will be shown up here.
It's everything is automatically done.
You don't have to write any codes or
make anything functional manually.
Everything will work like a butter. So
this is our website. This is looking
like this. Fully customized and super
perfect.
So today if you have learned something
new from this video, make sure hit that
like button, subscribe to our channel,
and share this video with everyone on
social media. It would mean world to me.
I'll catch you on the next amazing
tutorial. For now, bye-bye.
Full transcript without timestamps
In this tutorial, I'll show you how to create a fully professional and amazing looking e-commerce website for completely free. We'll be using the best resources to build this online shop. We'll use a free theme, a free page builder, and all free plugins to create everything step by step. To create this online shop, we have taken inspiration and features from some of the world's top e-commerce websites like Amazon, AliExpress, Walmart, Flipkart, and many more. Even though we're using only free tools, your website will still have all the core and necessary features of a modern professional online store. You'll be able to sell any type of product. Physical products, digital or downloadable products, products with different colors and sizes, even affiliate products that redirect to other websites. Basically, you can think of it like you can sell it with this website. We'll also cover some really advanced e-commerce techniques. Your customers will be able to add products to the cart very easily. Then their shipping cost and tax rate will be calculated automatically based on their location. On the checkout page, people will be able to pay using different payment methods like PayPal, credit or debit cards and even your local payment gateways depending on your country. So customers don't need to visit any third party website. They can complete the entire purchase directly on your store as we're handling payments. So, our website must be 100% secure. Don't worry, I'll show you how to secure your site properly by adding an SSL certificate. And I'll even make a real purchase so you can see everything working perfectly from start to finish. And we're still not done. Whenever anyone buys a product, you'll receive an instant order notification on your phone or email. This website will include some powerful extra features that many premium themes and plugins don't give you out of the box like wish list feature order autotracking style experience variation swatches for colors sizes and more. On the top of that we'll design this beautiful online shop from scratch without using any readymade templates. The good news is you don't need to write a single line of code. Everything will be done just using drag and drop. So even if you have never created a website before, this tutorial will still be perfect for you. We'll make this entire e-commerce website 100% responsive for tablets and mobile devices. We'll also set it up in a way that's SEOfriendly so your store has a better chance to rank higher in Google search results. This video will be your one-stop e-commerce solution. You'll be able to create any type of online store for yourself or for your clients. So, before we start, please pause the video for a second, give this video a big thumbs up, and comment down below how excited you are for this master class. It really means a lot and helps us to keep making these long in-depth free tutorials for you. Now, before we create everything step by step from scratch, let me quickly show you what we will be building in this tutorial. First, we'll add a professional header. On the left side, we'll place your website or brand logo. And on the right, we'll create navigation menus that let visitors move through your website easily. We'll also add a search bar so people can search for any products by name or category. Then we'll be adding user or account button so customers can log in or register, manage their orders, addresses, and account details. And of course, we'll have a cart button, the heart of any e-commerce website with a mini cart where people can quickly review their products, update quantities, go to the full cart page, or proceed directly to checkout. Next, we'll design a beautiful hero banner that instantly grabb attention with simple layout and clean color combinations will give your shop a modern aesthetic vibe. Right after that, we'll create category cards like people can go to men or women categories by clicking on them. Then, we'll add a product section to showcase some of your bestselling products where people can add items to their cart directly. Then we'll add testimonials to show what people think about your store, building extra trust and credibility. After that, we'll highlight some featured products with a stylish layout that looks like a premium theme. Right after that, we'll create a feature section to highlight your store's key strengths like worldwide delivery, live support, special discount, and more. Then we'll nicely show some of our blog posts. From here, people can click on these and read the full blog. And finally, we'll design a clean and flexible footer where everything will be easily changeable. Text, images, links, and a nice copyright area that you can fully control from the dashboard. Then, we'll create a professional shop page where visitors can see all the products in one place. They'll be able to add products to the cart directly or add them to wish list by clicking on hard icon. On the sidebar, we'll add powerful widgets like product search, price filter, recently viewed products, categories, and tag filters so people can quickly find exactly what they're looking for. When someone clicks on a product, they'll be taken to a full product details page. We'll set up this properly with product name and description, main product image, multiple gallery images, product variation like size and colors, a stock progress bar, quantity selector and add to cart button, full description, additional information and product reviews section and related products at the bottom. So your product page will feel complete, trustworthy and conversion focused. We'll build a detailed cart page where customers can review their products, remove items, update quantity, and see the exact costs on the right side. Also, I'll show you how to set up coupon codes so customers can apply that to have discounts. Then, we'll customize the checkout page where customers will enter their contact information, fill in their billing details, choose a payment methods. will set up different payment methods like cash on delivery, online payments like card, PayPal, Stripe, and other options. See all order details including taxes, discounts, and totals. And finally, place their order. Then they'll see a clear thank you page. We'll also create a blog page where you can publish articles for SEO and authority building. We'll design the blog listing and single blog page. Then we'll build a contact page very easily with an invaded Google map for your business location. Then clear contact information like phone number, email, and address and fully working contact form so customers can send messages. Can you believe we'll create all of these just by using free plugins and free page builder? And I'll show you everything step by step. Now let me introduce myself. My name is Ton Nishad. I'm a professional web developer and even in the past I have completed many freelance WordPress projects for my clients. So inside this tutorial you're learning the same methods and techniques that we use in real client projects. I'm really excited about this. Please give this video a big thumbs up. That's the only thing I ask from you. Other than that, this video is completely free. And if you like this video, you can always find it later easily from YouTube's like videos section. All right, we'll be building our beautiful e-commerce website in easy four steps. First, I'll show you how to get your domain name and web hosting. I'll also provide you with a 78% discount link so you can save a big amount on hosting. Then, we'll install WordPress. Next, we'll install and set up U-commerce plug-in. Finally, we'll start designing our amazing online shop. I'll be also adding timestamp in the description so you can always jump directly to the exact part you need. Let's now start with the step number one which is to get your domain name and web hosting. So first of all, what is a domain name? Domain name is basically your website address like Facebook has facebook.com, Amazon has Amazon.com, we have jimfadigital.com. Similarly, for your website, you need an address that will be your websiteename.com. And what is web hosting? Web hosting is the storage space for your website. All the images, all the texts you'll have in your website all will be stored on your own web hosting. As you are owning your own web hosting, so there won't be any limitation. You can run ads, you can upload any text or images, you can upload any themes or plugins you want. you are the in charge of your own website. Now, how to get your own web hosting with a free domain name. So, first just click on this very first link in the description below this video or you can just go to jimfadigital.com/best host and this will take you to a special discounted Hostinger page. But why Hostinger? In my opinion, Hostinger is the most affordable and also the fastest web hosting provider. are available. Just have a look into their trust pilot reviews. People are super happy with their hosting speed, affordable pricing and customer support. Now, from here, you can change the language if you want. Maybe you speak Spanish, Portuguese or Hindi. You can select your language from here. One thing I also want to say is that this page changes quite often. In fact, they probably change it once a month. So, if the banner or interface looks different, don't worry, don't panic. This happens quite often. It's the same website. Let's scroll down a bit. You'll find all the different plans. By the way, we can see four plans here, but sometimes you may see three plans here. Just don't worry because you can create your website with any of these plans. But as you are starting out, I recommend taking this premium or business plan. With both of these plans, you can create up to 100 websites. For example, today you're creating a portfolio website. Tomorrow you want to create a business website. and next week you want to create an e-commerce website. So you don't need to purchase hosting each time you can create all the websites within this same web hosting plan. So here with the premium plan you'll get 100 GB of storage. With the business plan you'll get 200 GB of storage and with any of these plans you'll get all the features like unlimited free SSL. So all of your websites would be encrypted and super secure, unlimited bandwidth. So there won't be any limit how many website visitors you'll have. You can create hundreds of professional email addresses like info at the rateyousite.com or admin at the rateyousite.com like really professional email addresses like these free automatic website migrations. So if you want to move your existing website from another hosting provider to Hostinger, just contact Hostinger support. They'll transfer it on behalf of you for free. Then free domain. Yes, like I said, you'll get a domain name for free. And that's not all. You'll also get tons of WordPress features like one-click WordPress installations, free one-click Google integrations. It will help your website monetize with Google AdSense and significantly improve its SEO. They have added awesome AI features as well. So, you can create website contents using Hostinger AI very easily. Now, let's talk about security. Personally, I'm very serious about website security and Hostinger just nailed it with all of these features like cloudfare protected name servers, malware scanners and all these. I've had very bad experiences with other web hosting providers. We have so many malware attacks and we had to pay the hosting providers additionally to use their other security tools. But here in the hostinger, you're getting all of these security tools for free. Now, let's select a plan. And like I said, you can take any of these plans based on your needs. If you are just starting out and on a budget, the premium plan is a great option. Also, you can always upgrade later. However, if you ask me, I'd recommend the business plan. Here's why. NVME storage. SSDs are great, but NVMemes are incredibly fast. Free Cydian. This feature can make your website load up to 40% faster. Daily backups. This is my favorite feature of the business plan. This ensures your data is safe and secure every day. Okay. So, let's click here on choose plan. All right. First, you can select the hosting period. 48 months, which is 4 years, then 24 months, 12 months, and 1 month. I don't recommend the one month plan since it cost around $14 per month, which is way too expensive. Instead, you can go for 12 months, 24 months, or 48 months. If you ask me, the 48-month plan is the best deal. For the first four years, you only pay $3.49 per month, saving you over $500. After that 4 years, the renewal rate is just $8.99 per month. Still very affordable for a hosting up to 100 websites. If you prefer starting smaller, you can choose the 12 months plan which costs 3.99 per month for the first year. After that, it renews at 13.99. But remember, the longer the initial term, the bigger the discount you will get when you renewing. If you can afford it, I highly recommend choosing this 48-month plan. It gives you the most savings and locks in the lowest rate for 4 years. But wait, there is more. You can click on have a coupon code and enter my special code which is JFD10. Once you apply it, you'll get a 78% discount. As we have applied the coupon code, if we take a look at here, the 48 months plan drops to 3.14 per month and the 12 months plan becomes 3.59 per month. Can you believe we're getting super fast web hosting with a free domain name for an entire year for just $43? What an amazing deal, right? For this tutorial, I'm selecting the 12 months plan. So, let's click continue. Now, let's quickly create a hostinger account. From here, either you can continue with Google or you can just use your email address. So, I'm going to use mine. And make sure you use your vest email address because later all the verification code will be sent to this email. Now let's put a really strong password. All right. Now let's click continue. All right. After successfully signing in, now we're here. You can fill up all these informations like your name, country, and then details and then click continue. Now you see you can pay using credit card, PayPal, Google pay or even you can pay using cryptocurrency. Also you may see more different local payment options based on your country. So here I'm putting my card information and then just click on submit payment. Now after successfully completing the payment you may see some onboarding like this but for some reason if you don't see this or accidentally your tab is deleted during the payment process you can just go to hostinger.com then click on login and you'll be inside your Hostinger's control panel and now all you got to do is go to our email inbox and you'll see an email from Hostinger says verify your email address. Just open it and click verify email. Now the email will be verified and you will be again inside the control panel. From here click on this continue creating or migrating a website. Click on this continue button and again we'll be on the same onboarding we have started with. So from here I'm just going to skip the surveys. Just click skip. And here it says do you want to create or migrate a website? So as we are creating a website, I'm going to check this one. Create a website. Now just click next. So this is the option to create a WordPress website. So make sure you select the WordPress from here instead of this Hostinger website builder and click next. And here's the login details for your WordPress account. First of all, you can change the language. Then you can change the email address for the WordPress account and also the password. So, I'm going to leave this email address here. And I'm going to enter a really strong password. All right. Now, let's click next. And here it says, what type of website do you want to build? So, instead of choosing anything from here, I'm just going to click on this create blank site. And here's the exciting part. We get a free domain name from Hostinger. We can claim a free domain name from here. So, here we can search for any domain name available. You can choose any domain name that fits your vision or business. Like you can just type your business.com or your name.com. And here you can check if this domain name is available or not. All right. So I'm just going to search a domain name for me. I just typed it and we can see this is available with the com extension. You can choose any extension like nme.net. I'm going to choose the.com extension because it looks more professional and legit. Okay, just click on here. And after selecting it, just click next. And here we have to register our domain name real quick. So from here, just click on this next step. And of course, make sure this is your own country. All right, next step. And it says your domain name will be registered using these details. So make sure every information is correct. So from here I'm selecting my division Dhaka and also the city and address. Then I'm going to put my zip code. I'm going to type in my phone number and finish registration. And you'll see an onboarding like this. It says where is your targeted audience located. You can select any country from here. I'm just going to select United States, Arizona. And now click next. Now it says it's installing the WordPress. This loading can take up to one or two minutes. And now it says it's ready to go. It's time to build your online success. And here, let's hold up for a moment because it's redirecting us into the WordPress. All right. So this is our WordPress dashboard. And by the way, for some reason it did not redirect you here. You can always just go to your Hostinger control panel, then go to the websites. And now inside the control panel we have to enable some settings. It seems overwhelming but it's too easy. We just have to enable one or two settings. So from here just click on this dashboard. Then click on this WordPress overview and just make sure you have enabled this force https. After enabling this click on this WordPress admin and this is again redirecting us into the WordPress. All right. So finally we are at our WordPress admin panel also known as the dashboard. From here I'll make you familiar with everything that you need to build an e-commerce website like from the posts to media pages, comment appearance, plugins and more. But before that let's clean up our dashboard a bit because currently this is looking a bit messy. So we can just close this welcome popup then close all of these unnecessary widgets or you can just click on this screen options and deselect everything one by one like this. and the screen will be clean. But there is more stuff to clean up. Click on this plugins and you'll see a bunch of plugins installed here by default. So if you're new to the WordPress, doesn't matter what plug-in you have here, just select all of them like this. Then from the bulk actions, select deactivate. Now click apply and all the plugins will be deactivated. Now select all the plugins again. And this time from the bulk actions select the delete and apply and click okay. And all the plugins will be just deleted. All right. Now let's go ahead and do some basic settings like changing your username and password. So just hover over the users and click on profile. So here first of all we can see admin color scheme. with it. We can actually change the whole color scheme of our dashboard. But this doesn't matter that much because only we can see this as a admin. So I'm just going to keep it default. Okay. Now scroll down and you'll find the language option. From the language you can choose any preferred language. There is so many options here but I'm going to keep it site default. Now let's scroll down. You can set your first name, last name, then your nickname and here on this option you can select any variation of your name. So this one is a bit important because this is the name which will be shown in your blog posts. So if you write a blog post this variation of your name will be shown as the author name there. So make sure you select the best variation from here. Right now let's scroll down. So here we can change email, we can change website address, but I'm not going to mess with these right now. So let's scroll down more and you'll find that new password option. Just click on set new password and it will just suggest your strong password. You can keep it and of course you can type your own password. So I just type my password although it's saying medium but I'm just okay with it. So scroll down and click update profile and all the changes will be saved we have made here. Okay. Right now let's do some other settings. So hover under the settings and click on this general. First we have the site title. We can change it to anything like my e-commerce website and as you can see this title will be instantly updated on here. Then we have the tagline. In the tagline, put some meaningful stuff like best online clothing store in California like this. So, this tagline actually can help you rank on the search engines. Okay. All right. Now, let's scroll down. You'll see this membership option. If you check this option, then anyone visits your website will be able to register on your website. And since we're making an e-commerce website, so we should definitely check this option. Right now, scroll down. You'll see the time zone setting. You can select any of these options according to your location or you can change the date format, time format, anything in between. Okay. So, let's scroll down and save the changes. And under the setting, I'm going to show you a really important setting, which is the permalink setting. Click on here. So here on the permal link structure we can see by default this is selected the plain permal link but in your case it might be set to day and name month and name number anything but I highly recommend you to choose this post name permal link because I'm going to show you an example for example you choose this plain permal link then your website address will be looking like your domain name slash some bizarre characters and numbers but if we choose the postname permal link it will be looking like a page name for example about us or contact. So this is more readable, it looks good and this can also help you rank on the search engines. Okay. So make sure you keep it post name. Okay. Now scroll down and save changes. All right. So at this point I'm going to make you familiar with two basic terms. One is the back end and other is the front end. So basically everything you're seeing here, all the options, all the contents is part of back end or the dashboard of your website. But if you want to see your front end website, you can hover on the site title and click visit site. And I'm going to open it on a new tab. And let's go to the tab. So this is our front-end website. And the whole world can see this portion of your website. Like if I just copy our domain name and let's open a private tab. And if anyone from anywhere in the world just paste the link in their browser, they'll just get to see this front end page. They cannot see anything on our dashboard or back end. Okay. Although right now our front end website is looking like this, but we can change its look and feel using themes. So let's go back to our dashboard. And if you hover over this appearance, you'll get the themes. In here, we have some themes by default. And this one, the 2025 is the active one. But for example, if I activate this 2022 one, then go to our front end website and refresh, the whole look and feel of our front end website will be changed. Okay. And of course, you can add new themes. Just click on this add new theme. And in the WordPress store, you can find thousands of thousands of themes. you can just install that and use that. So from here I'm going to search for a theme which is Wooifi and from here I'm going to click install. Then let's go back to our themes and activate this Ostify theme. After activating this we'll have some alerts and notification. I'm just going to close all of these. And also if we notice we'll see this newifi option in our sidebar but we'll get to that later. Now if we go to our front ended website and refresh and our website is looking like this right now. I know it's still boring nothing special because themes actually don't have such control over the website design. Themes just can add some base functionalities some basic base designs. But to really control our website design, we have to use page builders. And I think you already know what is the best page builder for WordPress. Yes, it is Elementor. With the Elementor, you can just control every inch of your website. And for this tutorial, we're going to be using the Elementor's free version. So, let's go ahead and get the free version of Elementor. You can just go to jimfad digital.com or if you just cannot find this post, I'll just paste the link of this page in the description. So just scroll down and here you'll find this link get element free account. Just click on it and we'll be in the element's official page. From here if you scroll down you'll see the element page builder plan. Although we using the element's free version but with the element pro version you can get so many features that is really helpful for any e-commerce website. So if you are making any e-commerce website in the WordPress element pro version is highly recommended. You can still make your website with element free but element pro just makes everything really easy. Okay. All right. Now let's scroll up and click on this element. And from here click on this login. And from here click on this create an account because we don't have any account. And you can just continue with your Google, Facebook or Apple account. But of course you can continue with your email address. So I'm just going to put my email and choose a strong password and just click create my account. And after successfully logging in, we'll be in our element's dashboard. Right? Now that we have created our free account, now we can close these tabs and go back to our dashboard. So now it's time to add the element as a plugin in our website. So we have to just go to the plugins. We don't have any plugins right now. So click on this add new plug-in. And on the search plugins, I'm going to search element. And you'll see the element here by element. And we can just click on install now. And now after installing it, let's activate this. Click on activate. And it will show an onboarding. So we can just click on this cross to close the whole thing. All right. Now, if we go to the plugins, we can see the element is here. Now, we actually need more plugins to create our website because as we are not using the element pro version, so we're going to be needing some other plugins. So, just click add new. Now, from the search, I'm going to search for elements kit. Just search it like this. And you'll see elements kit element add-ons and templates by Roxnar. So, this plug-in will add so many widgets for our design purposes. Just install it. Then we need some other plugins. This time I'm going to search Met form and you'll get this one. With this you can build contact form, survey, quiz and custom forms using element page builder. So install it. This is also by Roxnar. And now we need one of our main plugins which is called oocommerce. Search it. You'll see U-commerce by by automatic. And this is the plug-in will turn our website into an e-commerce website. So install. Okay. Now let's get more e-commerce plugins. Search here more convert wish list. And you'll see this. This is by more convert team. Install it. Now let's go for our final plug-in which will be variation swatches. And you'll see the variation swatches for oocommerce by Imran Ahmed. Click install. And if we go to the plugins, click on plugins. We'll see so many new plugins has been added which are not activated yet. So what I'm going to do, select all of them like this. Okay, we cannot select some of them. So after selecting from the B action, select activate and click apply. All of these plugins will be activated. Now before activating this plug-in, we have to activate this one. So click on activate manually and this one will show some setup from here. So just click on no not ready now just to skip this and go back to the plugins. Woocommerce is activated. Now let's activate the variation swatches. Okay, now all of our plugins are nicely activated. Elementor is for creating our website or building our website from scratch. Elements kit will add more widgets into the elementor. Made form will add functionality to create uh forms, quizzes with the elementtor. Then this plugins like more convert wish list will help to build wish list for e-commerce. Then variation swatches will help us to create variation products for our website. And finally, last but not the least, Woo Commerce will turn our website into an e-commerce website easily. And if you notice, after installing and activating all the plugins, we have extra options. So many options like MC wish list, WooCommerce, product, payment, analytics, marketing, so many options, right? So all the options will help us to build our preferred website. Okay. Now, as we're ready to go with the plugins, we're going to set up our oocommerce. Click on the oocommerce and it'll show us setup. Just click on this skip guided setup. But we have to select a country or state here. So, select your state and click on go to my store. It'll load for a few moments and it will be in the oocommerce. Now I'm going to skip all of this stuff and directly go to the settings. All right. So under the general first we'll set up our store location. So if you have any physical store or even any office you can just put the address on this address line one like city, zip code, avenue, road number, all of these. Okay. And address two is optional. You can put if you want but I'm going to put the city name here. San Diego and scroll down. So in the country or state I just selected the California. Okay. After that add your zip code here. So I'm just going to add my zip code here. All right. So this was the location or address of our store. Okay. Now scroll down. We have this general options. We have the selling location. On the selling location we have three option. Sell to all countries. Sell to all countries except for then sell to specific countries. If you select sell to all countries, your product is sellable to all the countries. If you select the specific country, you can select any specific country to sell your product to. For example, I'm typing Canada. So, currently your product is only sellable in the Canada. Okay. So, I'm just going to delete this. Then we have another option which is sell to all countries except for. So basically you can exclude any country. For example, I type United Kingdom. So now your product will be sellable to all the countries except for United Kingdom. Okay. So this is how it works. But for me, I'm going to select this sell to specific countries and then select United States because I simply don't want to sell my products overseas. All right. All right. Then we have got the shipping location. We have options. Ship to all countries you sell to, ship to all countries, ship to specific countries only, disable shipping and shipping calculations. So the first one is obvious like ship to all countries you sell to like if I sell to all the countries it should be shippable to all the countries right and we have other diverse options like ship to all countries even if you don't sell to all countries then ship to specific countries only like you sell in every countries but don't ship to that countries maybe you have digital products like ebook or any virtual products then only you sell those products but you don't actually need to ship in that case You can select this one or you can select disable shipping and shipping calculations. But for me, this one suits the best. So I'm basically shipping all my products to the countries I actually sell to. So basically my store is based on the United States only and my products are only shippable within United States. All right, simple. After that we have this tax option. By enabling this tax option, we enable all the tax rates and calculations. This is actually really important because if you sell your products in multiple countries, you should have different tax calculations for different countries. Even only United State has state based calculations like each state has different tax calculations. So I'm definitely turn this on and we'll understand and set up the taxes later. Okay. After that you have the enable coupons option. With this you can enable coupons for your store. So by using some codes your customer can get discounts. All right. After that we got the currency options. So first of all we can set up the currency that what currency we accept. You can choose US dollar, you can choose Canadian dollars, euros but for my store I'm going to choose USD. All right. Now that's it for the general. Let's now save all the changes. All right. After we have products tab, right, so first option here we have shop page. So in here we can select which page do we want to make our shop page. Basically this is showing all of our pages. So I'm just going to keep it shop. Okay. Do you have this placeholder image? So when there is not any product image by default as a placeholder it shows some default image. So we can just set the maximum size of that image. I'm going to put here the seven. Okay. After that we have the measurements. First on the weight unit we have multiple options like kilogram, gram, ellipse. And because we're selling furnitureures, so it will be best to choose kg or ellipse. Okay. So I'm going to choose the kg for now. Then you got the dimension unit. In here we have meter, centimeter, millimeter, inches. So I'm going to select the inches. And here we have this product reviews. You can turn on the product reviews on any product so people can add reviews or feedback on that product. Then product ratings to enable star rating on the product. So I'm just going to keep everything checked except for this one. Okay. So let's save the changes. All right. Now let's move to the tax tab. So under the price entered with tax we have the option yes I will enter prices inclusive of tax and then no I will enter prices exclusive of tax. So if you set this to yes your product price will be shown with the tax charge included. But if you select no your product price will be shown without any tax rate or any tax charges. But of course, people will be able to see the tax rate later when they're checking out the product. Okay. So for me, it makes sense to select the no option so that customer only can see the original price of the product, not the tax included. Right? So I select the no. Okay. Now scroll down. Keep everything as it is here. But on this additional tax classes, we have two option. One is reduced rate, one is zero rate. And we actually can see this option on here. The default one is standard rates. Then we have reduced rates. Then we have zero rates. We don't have to understand these really deeply for now. But just on this field, I'm going to add my own rate. And I'm going to call that custom rate. Okay. Now scroll down. Skipping everything just save the changes. And after saving it, you can see this custom rate has been added on this tab. Okay. So this is our custom rate. We will edit this custom rate. So just click on it and we'll be here and this is the place we will calculate the text rate for our different states or countries. So let's pay attention here. So first click on this insert row. It will simply add a row here. And first thing here we have to add a country code. And because the USA has state-based tax rate, so I have to add the state code. So to find out the correct tax rates and code, let's go to the Google and search for USA tax rates tax jar and you'll find this state link. Just click on it and it'll just show the whole map of USA with all the state codes like California, Nevada, Arizona, New York, everything. Okay? And if you notice different state has different tax rates. This one has 2.9% tax rate where Washington has 6.5% tax rate. Okay? So we need the tax rate for the California which is 7.25%. All right. So we got the tax rate. Now let's go back and here on the country code we'll just add USA. Just type US and United State will be selected. And then on this field we have to add the state code which we can see for the California this is CA. So just type CA. Then I'm going to skip all of these and go to the rate. So as California state has 7.25% tax rate. I'm going to just type that number first. And after typing the number, I'm going to add two zeros. I just added two zeros to complete the four decimal places. Okay. So, the whole number just means 7.25%. All right. Then on the text name, just put tax like this. Nothing else. On the priority, keep one. And on the shipping turn this off because I don't want any tax charges on the shipping. Now after making it like this you can save the changes. So basically we have calculated and decided the tax rate 7.25 for California US. Now any product we sell into this location will cost this percentage of tax. Similarly you can add more row like let's add a new row here. type US then instead of California this time let's say we select New York so the code is NY and New York has only 4% of tax rates so just put four here and add four zeros just to have four decimal places okay and on here type tax then priority one and uncheck the shipping and save changes and now we have just calculated the tax rate for New York and now let's say let's insert one more row and here let's say I type USA but on the state code I don't put anything just on the rate let's say I put 5% tax rate and let's fill up all of these and save changes so I have made a new rule which means doesn't matter which state you're selling your products to it will only cost 5% tax. Okay, because I just didn't select any specific state code. All right. Now, if you want, you can remove any selected row. For example, I selected this. You can click on this remove to remove that. You can select like this and remove it like this. Okay. So, I'm just going to keep one row for now. All right. Now, save the changes. So, this is how you make any rule for tax rate and calculate them correctly. And for example your store is outside of USA. So in this case you can search Google that what is the tax rate in your area and based on that information you can just calculate your own tax rate here. All right. Okay. I think that's it for the tax. I hope you at least get an idea about this. So now let's move to the shipping. Okay. So in the shipping you can add shipping methods and rates. So first let's add a shipping zone to add the shipping rates and shipping methods on it. Click on add zone. You have to put the zone name. So I'm creating a zone setup which is rest rest of the country. You can name it anything. Now this is zone region. Currently this is everywhere but you can select any specific region like here I'm searching United and I'm selecting United States and you can select multiple regions as a zone. Now for selecting we can click on add shipping method. So first here you see create shipping method which is we have two option which is free shipping and flat rate. For now I'm going to click on flat rate and click on continue. So you can rename your rate here. You can rename it anything like regular rate. And you can keep the text status taxable or none. If you want to add text on shipping, you can keep it taxable or if you don't want keep it none. Now this is cost. So this is basically shipping cost or delivery cost. If I make it 5.00. So basically my product shipping cost will be $5. Now this $5 is actually per order. I'm going to show you example. So this is a product right and we can select the quantity of the product. For example, a customer buys five of this products. In the quantity they select five and purchase five watches in a single order. So the shipping cost of the five watches will be only $5. But if you want the other way, like every quantity of product should cost $5, you can do that as well. Just leave a space and type star. Leave a space third bracket. Type QT y close it with third bracket. Now what will happen? Before it was costing the customer only $5 for shipping this five products. Now it will cost $25. So $5 for each product or each quantity of the product. You can actually do it if your products are heavy or really hard to ship. But as a electronics product, it makes sense if you keep it only five, not quantity based. You can charge them $10 for shipping, $9 for shipping. So in a single order, doesn't matter how many product they choose, how much the quantity is, they'll cost only $9 per product order. Okay. So here I'm keeping $5.00 per order. Now from here I'm going to click on create and save. So here I added a regular rate which is $5 per order. Now if you want you can add more. Click on add shipping method. This time I'm going to show you how to use the free shipping. So select the free shipping. Click continue and you'll have some option. You can choose the name first then then free shipping requirements. What free shipping requires? Click on it and you'll see multiple options. First no requirement then a valid free shipping coupon. Then minimum order amount. Then things like a minimum order amount or coupon. Then a minimum order amount and coupon. So let's select the minimum order amount. So in the minimum order amount, let's say I put $150. So if any customer orders for more than $150, they'll get free shipping. This is the requirement of the free shipping. They'll have to spend more than $150 or $150. This is the minimum amount. Now in here, you can click on uh create and save. and this method will be added. Now we can select any method during the creation of the product any time. I'm just keeping all these options available. Okay. Now we can also create shipping classes, different shipping classes other than the regular rate or free shipping. Scroll up, go to the classes. We can click on add shipping class. So for example, you have some product in your store that is really heavy or really hard to ship or it has really expensive packages. You can create different class for that like premium shipping. You can add any slug in here. So you understand that you can add any description. Actually you have to add a description for for the heavy packages. Okay, then you can click create. Now if we go back to the shipping zone and we we can see the rest of the country is already added. We can click on edit and it has two shipping methods regular and free shipping. We can go to the regular rate. Click edit. Now in here you'll see more option has been added. The shipping class costs. Now we can set up if that product has the premium shipping what that will cost. Maybe I type here $12. And here in the no shipping class cost, if it doesn't have any extra packages or premium packages, it should be back to by default $5. Okay, just put the same amount here as this amount. So when we will be creating products, we can select whether it's a premium shipping or any regular shipping. Okay. And you can add as much classes as you want. Okay. So let's save and we'll discuss more about it and more practically about it later during creating the products. Okay. So now scroll up enough ideas for shipping. Now we have to set up payments for our e-commerce website. Right. so that customers can pay us directly on our website. So click on payments and you'll see few options like accept payments through u then PayPal payments then things like take offline payments. This is basically cash on delivery. If you click on it this is the basic step like you can click on it and see direct bank transfer, check payments, cash on delivery. These are the offline payments. But we want to add really popular payment methods like Stripe and PayPal. And for that, we're going to need two simple plugins. One is for Stripe and one is for PayPal. So, you can really quickly go to the plugins. Scroll down, click on add plug-in, and in here we can search Stripe and you'll see this one, payment plugins for Stripe Woo Commerce. And this is by payment plugins. We need this one. We don't need other ones like this. So click on install here. Installed. Now we need one for the PayPal. So from the search I'm going to search PayPal. Just search it. And the same way you'll get this one uh payment plugins for PayPal WooCommerce. And this is also by payment plugins. So click install now. Okay. After installing, let's go to the installed plugins and simply activate these two. Selected like this from the bulk actions. Select activate. Click apply. And these two plugins will be activated. Okay, we're done. Now we have to go back to the oocommerce settings. Hover on the oocommerce. Go to the settings and then click on the payments. Now once we go to the payments, you'll see so many option has been added after installing the plugins. So before we didn't have the Stripe option, but now if you scroll up here, you'll see this credit cards Stripe by payment plugins. This one, this is a really nice one. And this one is already activated. We can see, but we have to manage this one. Before that, let's enable the PayPal one also. So scroll down all the way to the end. It should be here. Okay, this is here. PayPal gateway by payment plugins. This is inactive. So click on enable. If you want, you can also turn this PayPal credit card gateway by payment plugins. But this one is good enough. Now we have to set up the Stripe with our e-commerce website. So click on the manage. You'll land here. But we need to go to the API settings. We need to connect the API of Stripe with our plug-in here. So if you have the stripe account, log into the stripe. So after logging in the stripe, you should see a dashboard like this. And from here, click on developers and click on API keys. Scroll down. You'll see the publishable key and the secret key. First click on here to copy the whole key. Go back to the oocommerce or dashboard. And here scroll down you'll see the publishable key. So on this field delete and everything and paste that publishable key from the stripe. Now go back to the stripe and copy this secret key. Go back here, delete this secret key and paste the new one. This is our secret key. Now if we click on connection test and this is saying connection test to stripe was successful and this is on the test mode but when you're doing it for real when you're connecting the stripe account for real it will the procedure will be the same but make sure on your stripe you are on the live mode. Click on the switch to live mode here it will show some setups like adding your real cards and stuff. So after completing this verifications and all you'll be in the stripes live mode not in the test mode and also in here before pasting the publishable key and secret key make sure the mode you select is live from here. If you want me to make more detailed video about connecting stripe let me know in the comments. I'll make a detailed video about connecting Stripe with oocommerce. Okay. So for now I'm just keeping it on the test mode so I can show you how purchasing works. And in the test our method is successful here. Now I'm going to scroll down and click on save changes. So our Stripe is all done. Now during the purchase we can select Stripe card to pay. Okay. Now the Stripe is done. We can go back to the payments and manage the PayPal account. Scroll down. You'll see the PayPal gateway and click on manage. Click on API settings again. And the method is exactly the same from the environment. When you're doing it for real, don't select the sandbox. Just select production. That means live. Then from the PayPal's dashboard, you can copy the production key. You can paste the production client ID and production secret key. But if you don't want to do that, you can just click on connect to PayPal. And just after logging in with your PayPal account here, everything will be automatically connected. The payment gateway or or the payment method will be automatically set. Okay. So here I have connected my PayPal account and it the status says connected. Okay. Now save the changes and we're done with our payment methods. We have two options. One is Stripe credit card and other is PayPal payment gateway. Now we have the other options. Now these options are not that essential but if you want you can just check them out. I'm just keeping everything default here. Then let's go to the side visibility. In here we actually got to do some things. So if you notice here it says store coming soon because our store is on the coming soon state. But from here, if we just select the live option and save the changes, our store will be live. Okay, so this can be really useful when you're doing the production and finally releasing it. All right, now let's go to the advanced and you'll see you can actually set up the pages for cart page, checkout page, my account page. So for the cart page, I'm going to keep the cart. For the checkout, I'm going to keep checkout. And for the account, I'm going to keep the same account. Okay, just keeping everything default. All right, now let's move ahead to creating our products for our online store. And this is my favorite part. So from the sidebar, scroll down and click on this products. And obviously, we don't have any products in our website yet. So from these options, we can click on this physical product because I'm going to show you how to create a physical product first. Then I'm going to move ahead to show you how to create variable products, group products, then virtual products. So let's click on here. All right. So here first we have to add a product name. So I just pasted a name for my product. Now we can close this popup introduction pop-up. Okay. So after we have the product description. So if I show you the description is basically this text right here, right? So let's add a description here. I just added by the way this is a really high rich text editor. This is fully like a Google doc or uh Microsoft Word. You can select any text and edit that specifically like you can make it bold. You can make itallic like that if you want. And also you can select any text and color that text specifically like this. Okay. So I'm going to keep it as it is. Now if we scroll down this is the product data. First of all from here make sure you select simple product because we are creating a simple product. Under the general this is regular price and this is sale price. For example I put regular price as $70. Type the price like the $70 0. Okay. Then if you want you can add sale price like $65. Now on the product page this price will be cuted and this this price will be shown as current price. Okay. Now you can select the tax status as taxable shipping only or none. I'm going to keep it taxable and we can select the tax class and you'll see the tax class you have created on the tax setup. Right now after that we can go to the inventory and on the SQ the full form of the SQ is shopkeeping unit and this is basically an unique identifier for each product. So as an SQ I'm just going to copy the whole title from here. Paste the title in here and delete all the space instead add hyen like this just like this. And this is an unique identifier for this specific product. Then we can select the stock management. If we check it, we can show the quantity. How much quantity is left for this particular product. If this is 10, customer will see only 10 products left on the store. If you make it 100, you have 100 of these watches in your store. So, let's skip it 50. Okay. After that, you can go to the shipping and this is the shipping informations like weight and dimensions. So, weight is on the libs. So, you can put the product weight exact weight in the libs here in the libs unit. So I'm going to put a specific weight like this 0.22 libs which is around 100 g. Okay. But if you want you can change the weight unit as kilogram or g and the dimension is in the inches. So you can add the length like 2 in. Then width which is actually refer to the whole box of the watch. The width should be like 1.7 in and height should be like half of an inch. Okay. And from the shipping class, you can choose the created shipping class which is this premium shipping if you want, but I'm not selecting it because this is a regular product. So, no shipping class. Now, you can go to the linked products. You can add any products as an upsell or cross sales. If you have any other products on your store already, you can show that you can show that product as a upselles or cross sales. But we don't have any product in our website. This is our first product. So I'm going to tell you I'm going to talk about this options later when we have more products. Okay. Also, I'm going to show you all these options attributes when we are creating the variable product when the watch will have multiple colors. Okay. So this this all you need for a simple product. Nothing you have to do. Just scroll down and this is the short description. And that's the description you see on the products. Short description right here. So we can add a really short description like this. Okay. Now let's focus on the right side of the product. All of this metadata. First we can save this product as draft and save it later and publish that later. Then you can edit the status visibility. Then publish on date. You can edit the date and all of the meta data. Now, if you scroll down, we have this product image. We can set any product image as a thumbnail of our product. If I show you in the shop page, we'll have this product images or product thumbnail, right? Then if we click on any product here, it's showing the product real image. So this is the place we we can set the product image from. So click on here and it will open the media library where we keep all the images, all the videos files for our website. And this is currently empty. I'm going to upload some images in here. By the way, if you want to use all the images I'm going to be using here in this project, you can just go to jimfodgial.com. Link is in the description. And if you just click on this download the resources I have used in the tutorial, you'll get a asset zip file and from Google Drive just simply download that file. Then unzip that folder and in the folder you'll see two folders. One is templates. We're going to be needing this later. Then one is images. Click on the images and you'll have all the images I'm going to be using in this tutorial. So, let's go back here. From here, I'm just going to upload all the images by dragging and dropping it in here. Now, all of our images is being uploaded in the image library. Let's wait a few moments. Okay, all the images has been uploaded perfectly. Now, from here, we can choose a thumbnail for our product. I'm going to select this one and click on set product image and this image will be here. This is a transparent image and we can see this image as a thumbnail and the product image like this. Now if you want you can add product gallery from here. Click on this add product gallery images. So from here we can select multiple images like this like select an image and click on add to gallery. it will be added. Then click on gallery again. And select another image. This will be added. Okay. After that, we have the categories. We can categorize this product by using categories. So I'm going to deselect this uncatategorized and click on this add new category. We can add any categories like men's watch and click on add new category. Then add another category like women's watch. And we can dis we can select multiple categories like this or select only one category like this. After that we have the product tags. You can add any tags related to that product like women red strap analog like this. Okay. So these are the tags and categories. Then here you can add the brands like from what brand is this watch for. Then of course you can add a product video URL and the video will be played as a product intro video. Okay. So after adding all the information, all the metadata, all the images, you can just click on this publish to actually publish this product on our website store. Now if we go to our front end website, this is a this is showing a random post page. But we can go to our shop page by entering an URL. So after our domain name, if we type /shop and click enter, it will take us to our shop page. And we can see this watch has been added. We can open it. And by default, without any customization, this is looking like this. We can see the real image. We can see the original image. We can swipe through the galleries like this. And we can see all the information like the product name, product price, short description, product stock, then quantity selection and add toart button and all the metadata like these. We can see the description. You can see the additional information, the weight, dimension and also the reviews. And we'll fix everything here messed up like the buttons are overlapping each other. We'll fix that everything in customization. But we can say we have created our first physical simple product. And now I'm going to show you how to create variable product. If you have products or watches that has different sizes and different colors, I'm going to show you how to do that. So let's go back to the products. And from here we can click on the product. We can see one product. Now we can click add new product. So, first of all, we got to add a title, right? I'm going to rename this timeless elegance man's chronograph watch. Nice name. Now, let's add a product description. I'm going to paste the description here. And as you can see, we can actually add tables as well because this is a rich text editor. But on this watch information, we can just select it and make it heading two to make it bigger looking. Okay. Now I'll scroll down. We have the product data. So first of all from the selector we're going to select the variable product. Now after selecting variable product you see that uh price option is gone. The price option will be on a different part. I'm going to show you. But first of all what is variable product? I'm going to directly show you an example product. So this is a variable product. It has different color variables blue, gold and silver. And as you see for different color variation, it has different prices. The price is being changed when I'm selecting different ones. So we want the color variation for our own product. And here the pop-up is saying start by adding attributes. Add attributes like color sizes and all. So we can go to the attributes and add the attributes color sizes and all but I recommend you to go to this attributes under the products. Go to the attributes but let's open it on a new tab so we don't lose this progress in the product creation and also if you want you can just publish it. So it's saved. So as it's saved now we can go to the attributes. So in here first we got to add a name of the attribute. I'm going to name it color and on the slug you can add like accent color accent color of the watch. It means that now under the type let's select color and then click on add attribute. Now we can see the color is added here. Now we can click on configure terms. Now we can actually rename the colors directly. like first I'm going to make it blue and here like blue accent color and if you want you can add a description but we have this color picker here we can pick a color directly from a color picker like I'm choosing a blue color from here and clicking on add new color this blue will be added here now we can add another color like gold then on the color picker. We can choose a gold color. Something like this. You can also add color code in here if you want. So, we got the golden color. Now, click on add new color. And let's add our last color, which will be silver. And from the color picker, you can first select the white and choose a gray color that looks like silver. Or if you can Google the silver color code and add the code in here. So this is the exact silver color I have added. Now click on add new color. So basically we got three colors silver, gold and blue. And these are our color variations. Okay. After creating it we can close the tab and go to our product creation and make sure you update it first so it saves the product creation and it'll automatically refresh as well. So scroll down. Now if we go to the attributes then we can add existing attribute from here. So I'm going to search for color and the color is showing. Select and you'll see the color will be added like this. Then on the select values we can search for different uh color variations like blue, gold, silver. But I'm going to click on this select all and it'll select all of the colors. Now I'm going to click on save attributes. Okay. After saving the attributes I'm going to go to the variations and this is the important one. So here we have two option. One is generate variation and add manually. I recommend you to click on generate variations and it will ask for the confirmation. Just click okay. And it'll generate three color variation blue, gold and silver. And we can edit the individual ones. Like if we open the blue, we can add different image for the blue. We can add different im different price for the blue. We can add different sale price for the only blue. Then things like weight, dimension, we can add all of those things for specifically blue color variation. Okay. So from the upload image, I'm going to click on it. So for the blue variation, I'm going to select this watch image. It will be thumbnail for the blue. Then for the blue, I'm going to add the price here. So the regular price 110 and the sale price maybe $90. And this is in stock. You can add different weight, length, width, height. I'm going to put it quickly. Okay. Then you have option to select different uh shipping class like this, text class like this, and uh different description for different product. But I'm not going to add the description because we already have the description field otherwhere. Okay. So, let's close this blue one, blue variation, and open the gold variation. And for the gold, I'm going to choose the image. So, from here, I'm going to select this one. And this one's price 100 and sale price $80. And you can add so on. Now, I'm going to close the gold and add the silver image. and choose this image. This watch has silver accent color. Then on the price, maybe the price is $100 and sale prices $75. Okay, so we have added the prices and all the information for each variations. Now we we can still go to the inventory, add an SQ. I'm going to add the SQ same as the title, but of course modified like remove the spaces and add hyphen instead like this. I'm going to also turn on stock management and make the quantity 30 only. Then globally we can add all the metadata and product image. So, choose a product image for the whole product. I'm going to scroll down and choose the golden one as a thumbnail of the product. This will be by default shown. Now, of course, we can add other gallery images. Click on here. So, in the gallery, I'm going to put blue. Also, I'm going to add the silver one as a gallery. And if you want, you can also add a hands-on image from the gallery like this. this. I'm going to choose a random one. And of course, you can choose the categories. Deselect the uncatategorized. Select men's watch. And if you want, you can add another category. You can add brand name as a category and select that. Then on the tags, just put anything you want. You can also click on here and choose from previous categories you have created. I selected analog. then choosing or making blue, gold and silver. Okay, so just adding randomly some categories and as a brand you can add a brand name like this. Okay, so this is enough. So this is our variable product. Let's publish this or update it and see how it's looking in our page right now. So after publishing, let's go to my store. Go back. Go to the shop page. And we can see the variable product is added. And on hover, it's showing the gallery image. And as you see, this is showing it a little bit differently. On hover, this is showing add to cart, which is a simple product. But on hover, this is showing select options. Let's open this product. And we can see alongside all of the information, this is showing color attributes or color variations. So we can click on the blue. The image will be changed to blue. We can select gold. Image will be changed to gold and it will be silver like this. We can also click on clear to clear the variation choosing. And also the uh different color has different prices as we set up right. So it has all the informations and here this is now showing related product like the it's showing this product as related product because it has a similar tag and similar category as this product we have right this is men's watch the category is men's watch and also this products category is men's watch so this is showing as a related product everything is like smart and automatic with oocommerce. We don't have to worry about tiny details. Okay. So this was our variation product where we can add same product but with different variations. The same way we have created the color you can create other variations like sizes, brands, all of them. Okay. All right. Now I'm going to show you how to create virtual product or digital product. If you want to sell any digital product on your website related to watches like an ebook, you can do that. I'm going to show you how to do that. So click on add new product. And first I'm going to show you an example of it. So in our shop you see this product. This is a digital product or virtual product. This is about complete guide for strap adjustment, time setting and maintenance for a watch. So after anyone buys this product, they can directly download this PDF file attached with this product. And I'm going to show you how to do that exactly like this. So first let's add the product name. And one more thing I didn't show you. This is the perma link and you can see a link generated as a page link and this is based on the exact title we're having here. So if you want you can click on edit to edit that permal link. I'm going to show you what this is for. So if you if you open a product right on the address bar you'll notice the product title is on with the link right. So if you want you can adjust or edit the product title as a permal link right from here. Okay. All right. Now let's go ahead and add a product description here. Now scroll down and from under the product data this time we're going to select the simple product but on the right side I'm going to click on virtual and also check the downloadable option. Virtual makes the whole product virtual and the downloadable makes the product downloadable. We can attach files like PDFs, videos or anything we want. Then first we have to set the price here. Let's set the regular prices $50. And we don't have any sale price. Then we have the downloadable files option. Just click on the add file and we can add files through any link or click on choose file and directly choose any files from your media library. So in here I'm going to upload my PDF file. So I have a PDF file which is this all about the watch. Now I'm going to upload that PDF file in our media library. Just drag and drop the PDF file like this in here. it will be uploaded pretty easily and just click on insert file URL and this URL will be selected and this URL is from our web hosting or our media library. If you want you can add more files but I'm okay with this. Now we can set up a download limit. How many times a customer can download the PDF file after purchasing. I like to keep it unlimited. Then download expiry. I like to keep it never. Then uh this is taxable status. I'm keeping it taxable and tax class keeping it standard. Okay. Now in the inventory just put a simple sq really simple like this and it'll work. Now let's go to the right part and add an image for the PDF. So click on here choose thumbnail and in here I have a thumbnail already for the watch PDF and insert this image. Now scroll down. We can add a new category which will be called ebook selected. Now on the categories we can add many categories like this like this. Okay. Now you can just publish this product. Now if we go to our store, we can see this is our virtual product. We can open it. We can purchase it. You can select the quantity. But it doesn't matter how much you how many you are purchasing because this is a digital product. But other than that, this is a simple product with all the information. But you can see there is no extra description at all because this is a virtual product. It doesn't have any dimension at all. Also, there is no related product because we don't have any categories or tag matched with any product. Okay, this is the difference. Now, we learned how to create a digital product. Later, I'm going to show you if a person buys this product, how they can download the PDF file. It's really easy. So, we got three kind of products. simple, variable and virtual. Now I'm going to show you the last type of product which will be really interesting which is an affiliate product. So let's click on add new product. Okay. So first thing let's add a name then add a description. After that now from the product data select external or affiliate product. Now everything will be gone and this product URL and the button text will show up. First you have to put your affiliate link like here I'm putting my Amazon affiliate link. Now here on the uh button text you can say buy product or you can type buy from Amazon like this. So people know this is an affiliate product and it will take them to the Amazon product page. Now you can uh put the price. I'm going to make it the exact price as the Amazon $107. And the rest of the options doesn't matter like taxes and tax classes because this product will be purchased from Amazon page, not our page. Okay. So, we can of course select a thumbnail for this. So, you can see the image from here. I'm going to select this one. And as a gallery image, we can add one more image like this. And also we can select any category for from existing ones like this. And also add tags from existing ones. Now we're ready to publish this and we'll see how it looks. Publish. Go to our shop. Refresh the page. And you'll see the affiliate product has been added here. So, we can click on the product. It'll take us to the product. Okay, we didn't add the short description here. So, we can go ahead and quickly add the short description here like this. And update and go back there. Then refresh the page. And we can see this is the product and this is an affiliate product there. There's no quantity selection or stock left showing. We can see all the details all the related products to this. Now if we anyone clicks on this buy from Amazon it will take them to that exact Amazon affiliate page and from there they can easily buy that product. So with the affiliate link you earn the commission from Amazon selling it on your store. Okay. So these were the four kind of products. simple product, virtual product, affiliate product, and the variable product. Now you know how to create all of these. So we can go to our dashboard and click on the products. We can see we only have four products, but to fill up our store to make it look good, I'm going to quickly add more products behind the camera. I'm going to quickly add the products and come back to you. Okay, I have added all the products the exactly same way. Now if we go to our store, our shop, we can see this is full of products. Now our store is looking fulfilled. You can add as many products as you want. The process is exactly the same I've showed you. By the way, here I'm going to show you a thing. You see the star rating here. So you can basically star rate any product and the product you star rate will be basically featured products and later we're going to add featured product in our homepage. It will look really nice. Okay. So now before we start to showcase our whole e-commerce system how it works. Let's create coupon codes for our products. So through the coupon code we can add discounts on our product and it's really easy just go under the marketing and click on coupons and from here click on add new coupon. So here basically we have to add the actual coupon code. So for example I'm adding JFD 20 and in the description I'm typing 20% discount. Okay. Now after that we have coupon data. So in here we have the option discount type. Currently this is fixed card discount. So for example on the coupon amount if I make it 50 doesn't matter what the product price is. The coupon code will give $50 discount. But if we select the percentage discount and we type 50, doesn't matter what the product price is. By using that coupon code, the product price will be 50% less or discounted. So I prefer the percentage discount and also the coupon amount I want 20. So it will be 20% as our description says 20% discount. Then we have the option allow free shipping. So if we allow this, if we check this by using this coupon code, the shipping will be free for that product. Okay. So I don't want that. But if you want, you can allow it. After we have the coupon expiry date. So if you click on here, you can choose any specific date. For example, I choose 14. So after this date, the coupon code will be expired and no longer eligible to use this coupon code to have discount. Right? Then let's go ahead and go to the usage restriction. In here we have so many options like minimum spend, maximum spend. So in the minimum spend, you can add a number. For example, 100. So, in order to use this coupon code, customer has to at least purchase or at least spend $100 while purchasing the product, right? And this field, this maximum spend, this field allow you to set a maximum number a coupon can be used on. For example, we have 20% discount and the maximum number of product is $500. So if anyone buys product more than $500, they cannot use this coupon code. They no longer will be able to use this coupon code to have discount on the price. Okay? Even if it's $51, the coupon code won't work. Okay? But I don't want any limitation, any usage restriction. So I'm just removing all the numbers. So the minimum spend and maximum spend is unlimited. Okay. So let's scroll down and we have the other options like products. You can choose any specific products to attach the coupon code on. So for example, I select a product in here, this luxury goldplated women's. So this coupon code will be only available for this specific product which is this. You can add more products, more than one products in here if you want. Exactly like this. So this coupon code will be only available to these two products and you can also exclude products like if you select any products here just search the product and you select one product here. So on that product you cannot use this coupon code. It's like this. But I don't want I don't want to uh include or exclude any product from the coupon code. I'm going to keep it empty. And also you can uh associate this coupon code I mean make the coupon code exclusive for product c specific product categories specific product brands then allowed emails all of these. Okay. Then we have the usage limit here. It has usage limit per coupon. You can set a number like 10 1 2 3 any any number or keep it unlimited. So this coupon can be used unlimited amount of time. Okay. Then you have the limited use to X item and usage per usage limit per user. Let's set the usage limit per user 10. And the rest I want to keep it unlimited and empty. Okay. So we are basically created a coupon. Now we can just publish it and the coupon will be available to use. Okay. During the checkout I'm going to show you how to use the coupons. And now actually we're going to overview the whole system of e-commerce. How people can buy it, how people can add to cart, add to wish list, then after how they can purchase it. So let's start with adding some products in our cart. So from the shop page, let's add some few random products like this. Just click on add to cart and it will be added to the cart. a sidebar. A mini cart will be show up here. You can just close it like this. Then let's add one more from here. And then let's add this virtual product also. And as you can see these are being added nicely here. Then let's add one which has multiple variation like this one. So for this one we have to click on select options. Then it will take us inside the product. And from here we have to choose colors and variation. Like from here I want the blue one which price is this and select the quantity. Then click add to cart. This one will be also added to the cart. And we can see the shopping cart is the number is four. Right now for product is selected or added to the cart. So we can open the cart right from here and click on view cart to open the cart. By the way, before that, let's see how wish list works. So, from here, I h click on add to wish list and the product will be added to the wish list. Okay. And we can see the wish list by going to the dashboard. Click on the users icon and go to the dashboard. Here we have so many settings like dashboard, my wish list, order, download, so many things. I'm going to go through every of them later. So first let's go to the wish list. My wish list and you'll see true product I have just added into the wish list showing here. And from here you can also click on add to cart to move the product to the cart. From here you can share this product or wish wish list on any social media in here. And this is the wish list. And I'm going to show you all these options after we make a purchase. Okay. So from here let's open the mini cart. Then we want to see the whole I mean full cart page. So click on view cart and it'll open the full cart page where you can see the products all product details. Then you if you want if any customer wants they can increase the quantity of the product. Then if they want they can remove the product from here. Then also on here it has a add add coupon option. In here they can add coupon codes but I'm going to add the coupon codes in the checkout. Okay. Then they can see the subtotal here. Then they can see the regular rate which is the shipping rate. And this is the estimated total which is this amount. Okay. Now after seeing all the information people can click on proceed to check out. And this is our checkout page where we fill up our contact information like email then shipping addresses. In here we have to select the country or region, our first name, last name, address, city. So very quickly I'm going to add all the details and come back. Okay. Then it has a phone number which is optional. And then if we scroll down here we have the payment options. First the card is selected which is by stripe but you can choose the PayPal also. And during the checkout it will ask for the PayPal login or PayPal payment request. Okay. But now for now I'm going to click on the card number to add my card. Okay. So let's add the card card number. Then if you scroll down, you can click on save payment information to my account for future purchases. Okay. So I'm going to do it. I'm going to check this so it will be easier for me to buy products with my card in the future. Okay. Okay. Now if we focus on the right side, we can see the order summary. All the products are showing here. Now here we have a option add coupons. Okay. So here we can add the coupon codes we have. So earlier we have created a coupon code called JFD 20. And if we type the coupon and click on apply the coupon code will be working and we're getting $100 discount. This is showing it like this. And all together with all the discount and charges our total price is this amount. So after seeing this just scroll down and click on place order and after placing the order it'll show the thank you page. It says thank you your order has been received. It'll show the order number, date, total, payment method, all of these. And it has a section which is downloads because if you remember, we have added a virtual product into our card and purchased. This is called complete guide for strap adjustment, time settings and maintenance. So we can just click on here under the download and a PDF file will be downloaded directly which we can read like this. It's cool. And under the order details, we can see all the order details. The individual prices, subtotal, discounts, shipping, and total. Every information we want to see, it's available here. Okay. Now, it says order has been received, which means the order information is sent to the administrator of the website. So as an admin from our dashboard we can just go to the orders to see the order. Uh from here scroll down hover over the oocommerce and go to orders and we can see this order is pending or processing. We can see the name of the client and if we click on here we can open that particular order. In here we have so many options. We can see all the details all the order details we we need to see. Now from the status we can we can make it processing on hold completed canceled refunded failed or draft. So I'm going to make it completed as an administrator. And from under the orders actions, we can choose actions like send order details to customer, recent new order notification, then generate download permissions. So I'm going to click on send order details to customer and click on update. And the customer will get a order details copy and the order will be completed. Now as an user if we go to our dashboard then we go to the orders we can see we have this order. We can click on view and we can again see all the details and we have the download link for the PDF file. Okay. So this is our orders. Now we can go to the download option and from here we can again download the PDF file. The downloads manage all the downloadable things. Now we can go to the addresses. If a customer wants they can edit their billing address and shipping address just by clicking on edit billing address or edit shipping address like this. They can totally change all the information like first name, last name, street address, country, city, zip code, phone, literally anything. Okay. Then they can go to the payment methods to add more payment methods or delete existing payment methods. Then we can uh they can go to account details to manage all the personal information, password and all. Then finally they will have a option to log out from the account. All right. So this was the basic overview of how the whole e-commerce system works. So we can say our e-commerce is working perfectly fine but one problem is our landing page or the main website is looking really ugly like there is nothing there is no cache there is no interest of exploring the website. So we're going to replace our landing page or the front page with a nice and professional website design. I'm going to show you the design we're going to be adding today. So for that just go to kitninja.com. I'll put the link in the description. So this is kitninja.com. Here you'll find super professional e-commerce websites designed. These are made by professionals with years of experience. The designs are super dedicated for each niche. And there are so many categories of website design, so many categories of niches. And the perk is they're super affordable. So from here, I'm going to search for the template we're going to be using today or creating today. So from the search here, if you search wristy and in here, you'll get an element template kit which is super professional and at the same time affordable. Let's watch it. Click on here. So from here you can click on live demo and you can see the website like this. You can check the mobile responsiveness, tablet responsiveness, everything. And of course if you click on this visit site, you can experience the whole website live like this. This is really super professional. As you can see, everything just looks really good. So, we're going to be designing exactly the same template today for our e-commerce website. But as you know, designing a website like this takes some time. Although I can show you how to create these kind of website in 2 three hours. But to actually build those following me can take one day or multiple days. So if you don't have such time to create an website like this, you can actually get this exact design and you already know where to get it. Just go to kitninja.com and from here you can easily purchase this template for a really good price. But let's say you are a freelancer or an agency. In that case, you can actually grab all the template kit Kit Ninja has in one go. Just click on grab buy all deal and here you can get access to all premium template kits. You just have to download the templates and import it to Elementor. And if you scroll down in here, you'll see the single versus all access comparison. So with the all access, you're not only getting 100 plus template kits rightway, you're getting five plus new templates per month. And of course, you'll get all of their future updates in the single plan. That means everything they upload, if you have the lifetime access plan, you'll get those templates right away. And everything you are getting with this plan is just for $59. If you are a freelancer or an agency, with all of these template kits, you can easily earn $1 to $5,000 making websites for your clients because the design of these templates are the greatest. All right, now let's go back to our tutorial. So, if you want to buy the template we're going to be using in this tutorial, which is this one, it's called wristy. You can just buy it really easily. Then watch 2 minutes video guide and you can just install it on your website and your website, your e-commerce website will be looking like this in no time. But still, if you want to make the whole website step by step with me, then let's continue and go back to our tutorial. Okay. Now in order to create a homepage like this, we have to create page right then when we'll be creating other pages like uh blog page, contact page, about page, we're going to create those pages. But first let's create a homepage. So let's go back to our WordPress dashboard. From here, click on the pages. So under the pages we can see so many page has been added and it's mostly by oocommerce by default uh some pages like cart page, checkout page, dashboard, my account all of these added by oocommerce. Okay. Now we have to create our own page. Click on add page to do that and you'll see an interface like this. So on the add title I'm going to name it home. just home and click on publish. Then again click on publish and the homepage will be published. So we can go back and we can see the home is added here. We can click on this uh view and we can see the homepage is looking like this. There is literally nothing. This is a fully white empty page. But if we go to our front end website, like if we just type our domain name, it's landing us to a totally different page where you can see a random post and random informations. We don't want that. We want our homepage to show to be shown if we type our domain name. So to do that, go back to the dashboard and scroll down under the settings. Go to reading and we have the option your homepage displays. Currently this is your latest posts which we can see this random posts but instead we'll select a static page and from the homepage we want to select the page. So we have just created this homepage right? So I'm selecting this home as homepage. Then scroll down and click on save changes. Now if we just go to our domain name from anywhere in the world from any browser, it will always take us to that homepage we have created. Although it is fully empty and white, but we're going to turn this empty and boring page into this masterpiece of a design in this tutorial today. Just trust me and follow the process. In order to customize this, we already have Elementor page builder. So, let's go back to the dashboard. Go to the pages and open the homepage. Just click on the home. And we want to edit this homepage using element page builder. So, we have the option edit with Elementor. Click on it. And from here, just close the notification. And we can see our homepage is opened by element page builder. And the real fun will begin from now. We can see our front end website and the element page builder looks exactly same. We have a default header. We have a default footer and in the middle this is fully empty exactly like this. Right? So in in the empty space we will add elements like these. Okay. all of these. I'm going to show you exactly step by step how to do it all. But before we dive into creating our design, let's understand or get familiar with Elementor page builder like how it works. Okay. So on the right side, as you can see, we'll build a website from scratch. But if you notice on the left side, it has a sidebar. And inside the sidebar, it has widgets and elements like layout, containers, grid, heading, image, text editor, video, button, all of these basic elements. But if you scroll down a little bit more, you'll see the pro drop-down. In the pro, you'll have some advanced tab like search, posts, portfolio, gallery, image, galleries, loop, carousel, all all of these. But these options or these widgets only comes with the Elementor's pro version. But don't worry, we can build our website only by using Elementor page builder because in the free ones there are so many elements and widgets and also we have our third party plugins like elements kit. With the elements kit there's there comes a lot of plug-in and widgets. Then with the mid form so many we'll get so many customization widgets. Okay. Here you can see one more uh widget or plug-in which is more convert. Using this we can create design of wish list. Okay. So for now I'm just going to turn this off like this like fold this and we're going to use mostly from the layout and the basic. Okay. So let's see how element page builder works. First we can drag any elementtor and drop it inside this box. Let's say I add this container. And the container basically adds a basic box like this. And if you now notice on the left side, the whole thing has been changed. We have so many options just for this newly added containers. So we can control this container right from the uh sidebar. For example, we can make the content width full width. Now, if we decrease the width like this, you can see the box width has been decreasing. Then you can use main height to control the height of this box. Then if you want, you can go to the style and click on this background type classic. And if you click on the color, you'll be able to pick any color for this container or for this box. Okay. Now, within this box, inside of this box, you can also add items or contents. So, click on this plus or this plus and all the widgets will come up again. Now, let's say I add this heading widget inside of this box. It will be inside of this box. Now you can triple click to change the text or you can use this field on the left side to type any text exactly like this. Right now if you want to style this text, you can go to the style tab of this text. Then we have the alignment with it. We can center the text like this. Then we have the typography. We can open the typography. And there are so many options like font family. There are so many font styles or family available for free. We can choose any font family like this and it will be instantly changed to that. Then we can search for font family like one of my favorite font family is poppins. I'm searching and selecting it will be instantly changed to that. Then using the size slider we can decrease or increase the size of the text or if you want you can put the exact value you want for the text. Then using the weight we can make the text thin or bold. Higher number makes it bolder. Lower number makes it thinner. Okay. Then we have the transform. Using it we can make the text uppercase, lowerase, capitalize all of these. Then with the decoration we can make the text underline, overline, line through all of these. Then using line height we can increase or decrease the line height of any text line. Then with the later spacing we can literally add space between each of the letters. And similarly with word spacing we can uh increase the space between each of words. So combining all of these options you can create really nice typography. Okay. So I'm just uh selecting the value and and clicking backspace to delete and making it back to default. Okay. Now let's close the typography. We have other options like the text color using it. Obviously we can change the text color to anything we want. I'm making the text color like this for now. Okay. So this was an example. Now let's add more kind of uh elements or widgets to showcase. Let's say I add this text editor. The text editor also adds a text widget or text element. But this time we get this super rich text editor with it. We can literally select any portion of text like this and individually stylize that like changing its color. You see the color has been changed then styling it making it bold. itallic, underline, all of these. So this is basically like Google Drive or Microsoft Word. With it we can do many things. Okay. But of course it has global stylization like go to the style. You can of course make it center. Then open the typography to choose a font family like popins, increase or decrease the font size like this. Then uh control the font weight and all of the other option comes with the header. Of course, you uh will be able to change the text color to anything. So, this this text editor widget is more suitable for paragraph kind of text and this heading widget and is more suitable for heading text like big text. Okay. Now, let's add one more final element like this button. Just drag and drop under the widget and a simple button will be added. You can change the button text from here like change to anything read more like this and under the link you can put any link you want for example you type here google.com now if any person clicks on this button it will take them to google.com another example like you type Facebook.com your account. Now by clicking on this button, it will take them to your Facebook account. How cool. Okay. Now this button also has its style tab. In the style, we can make the position center to make it center. Then the button also has the typography because it has text in it. Like we can open the typography, make uh choose any font family. And of course we have the size slider like this. Then we have so many other options like the text color. By the way, you can click on this color sampler and pick any color anywhere from your screen. Just click on the color and select the color. And the button color will be exactly like this. Then we have the buttons background. Select classic. And you can change the background color of this button like this. Super simple. And I'll show you so many options available with the button later in this tutorial. So this is how basically element works. By the way, I want to show you some spacing things. So with the button, we can go to the advanced and we have the margin. So if I unlink the margin, we can put individual value to each side. Like maybe on the top I type 100 and you see on the top of this button 100 pixel gap or space will be added. Then I type 50 pixel on the bottom. On the bottom 50 pixel space will be added. Okay. Now I'm going to be showing you a really important concept which is flexbox. So this blue box is the main container. Right? We can also follow this container and all the structure in the structure tab. Click on the container. And in the container we can see under the container we have the heading, text editor and the button. So we can select the container, go to the layout and scroll down. Let's make the width a little bit longer like this. And scroll down. If we make the direction row, all the elements inside will be ordered in a row. But if we make it column, everything will be placed in a column. Okay. Then we have things like justify content center to make it vertically centered. align item center to make it horizontally centered. Then gaps to add gaps between elements like this. Okay, so I think it's enough theories and explanation for how element page builder works. Now we'll actually get to the real work and turn our website into this. By the way, if we publish this website or the homepage, then we go to the front end website and refresh. Before it was a fully empty page, right? But after refreshing you'll see it is turned to this design we have designed in the element page builder. How cool. Okay. So from the structure we can just we can right click on that container and click on delete to delete all the example stuff. Okay. Now first we're going to start creating our banner section. The banner section is this. It's divided into two part. So let's start. All right. So the first thing we're going to add is a new container in this box. And on the structure, I'm going to double click on that container and rename that banner section. Basically, renaming any container doesn't do anything functionally, but it just to keep everything organized. So you can follow me step by step perfectly. By the way, uh through the tutorial, follow this structure so you'll know what I'm adding, what I'm deleting, where I'm placing things. Okay. So, first I have added a container which is named banner section which is this. All right. So, on the banner section sidebar, first keep the content with boxed but make the width 1240 pixel. Okay. Then scroll down make the direction row. So anything I put inside it will be placed in a row like I have showed you earlier. Now scroll down. You'll see the gaps is by default 20 pixel on the column and row. But I'm going to make it all zero. Now I'm going to color my banner section. I'm going to color it exactly like this. Half of the color is this beige type of color and half of the color is fully black. So there's a really nice and easy trick to do this. go to the style and choose the background type gradient. So basically with the gradient color we can choose multiple or two colors at the same time for any container. So on the first color which is this I'm going to type a color code here to achieve that color. Just type hash fff 7f3. We'll have a beige type of color which we can see on the top. We can barely see it. Then if we make the location here 50%, it'll be taking half of the space of this container. Okay. Now let's edit the secondary color. Then here type a color code which will be fully black. So type 0000 0. This code is for a fully pure black. Okay. Now also make the black's location 50% and the black color will also will take 50% of the whole container. Now I want to change the angle. Right now this is uh 180° but if we make it 90° the angle will change. This is really fun. You can just play with the angle as you can see like this. But I'm just going to make it 90°. So half of the uh container is this color and half is black color. Okay. Now scroll up go to the advanced tab. Now let me reduce the padding. So using the padding we can add space inside of this container. Using the margin we can add space around a container. For example on the top I add 100 pixel. On the top 100 uh pixel space will be added. But if we uh make the padding top 100, you'll see the box will add 100 pixel on the top but inside of this box within the box not outside like this. Okay. So this was an example. So delete the margin. Just make it default like this. But let's make the padding 30 pixel on the right, 30 pixel on the left. So we have a nice gap on the left and right. Okay. Now inside of this banner section, let's add one more container within it. Now this uh make sure this container content width is full width and make the width 50%. So this container will take only 50% of the whole container space. Then scroll down and make the gaps zero. Then go to the advanced. I'll link the padding on the top 172 on the right 47 and keep the bottom and left zero. So we'll have g the gap like this gap or space like this. It will all make sense once we start add the contents and items inside the container. For now just uh keep following me as I'm doing. Okay. Now the first thing we're going to add here is a text editor. Click on here. Scroll down. Add the text editor within this container. Now let's change the text. We don't want any dummy text in here. I'm going to change it to elegant collection this text. Now go to the style. So here first of all we're going to edit the typography. Click on the pencil icon. And as a font family I'm going to search a font which is called jost. And this is a really good looking phone as you can see. Now for the size, I'm going to make it 16 pixel. So it'll be this big. And keep the weight 400. Then scroll down and make the line height. First from here, select the em property. This is a different unit size unit. So uh on the line height, type 1.5 and it will be like this. Now close the typography. Now let's add a text color. So on the text color, let's make it fully black. If we just drag this knob all the way bottom and left, it will be all 0 0. So fully black color. Now scroll up, go to the advanced only the margin. I want to add some uh space on the bottom. So 16 pixel. Let's make the g uh padding zero. Okay. So after this text editor, I want to add a heading widget here. And let's change the heading text. I added the heading text like this. But you see it's added in a single line or a single row. But I wanted it like this. So after this first two words I'm going to type less than bran and it will be the exactly like this. Okay. The line will be broken with this. So now let's go to the style to style this text nicely and of course open the typography and for this one I'm going to search a really good looking type uh font family which is called Marcelus. This is that select it and you see this font is actually really good looking. Now let's make the size exactly 64 pixel. It will be this big. Then make the weight 400. So it will be a little bit lighter. Then scroll down and you'll understand the line height a little bit better in here. You see as I'm dragging and dropping like dragging and sliding the line height is controlling like this. So I'm going to make the line height first. Select the em type 1.06. It will be like this. And finally, I'm going to make the later spacing minus two. So later spacing will compact I mean uh compact the text like this. Okay. But it should be only minus2. Now let's close the typography. Go to the advanced and also on the margin bottom make it 16 pixel. Okay. Okay, after this heading, I want to add another text editor right here and change the text. I'm going to add a short description or short paragraph. Now go to the style and open the typography. This font will also be merc. Okay. Now the size will be 16. Weight will be 400. And that's it. Now let's make the color a bit. I'm going to add a color code 696866. Just type this color and you'll have exactly the same color. Okay, now this is looking like this. Nice. Okay. Now go to the advanced and also I'm going to add margin bottom 70 to pixel. All right. Now I'm going to add an image which is will which will be this image. Okay. So click on plus and you'll see the image widget. just drag and drop it here after the text. So from here we can choose any image. Click on choose image and if you already have the resources I have given you have downloaded the resources from here you'll see all the images in the media library. So from here I'm going to choose an image. I'm going to select this one. This is called image 8. WEBP. Click on select. And this image will be loaded here. Now we have to make this image this shape right rounded on the top. It's actually really easy. First go to the style and first make the width. Select the pixel. Type 3 1 2 pixel. The size will be like this. Then let's make the image height. Put the exact value 3 80 pixel. The height will be like this. But you see the image is actually stretched. To fix that, make the object fit here. Cover and the image will be nicely covered or nicely cover the whole container without stretching the image. Okay. Now scroll down and you'll have this border radius option. So using the border radius, we can actually make the image rounded. Like if we make it 20, you see the corner will be rounded. But I'll link the value on the top make it 250 pixel and the top will be rounded like this and on the right make it 250 and all together it will be rounded just on the top. Really cool right? All right. So finally I want to make this image all the way on the left side exactly like this. So just go to the advanced tab and make the align self start and it'll be just on the left side. Okay. All right. Now let's add a button a really nice button like this. We can simply click on the plus and add a button right after the image. It'll be added here. First let's change the text. This button says shop now. And on the link, let's add our shop page. Just type shop and the shop page will be suggested. Select the shop page. So by clicking on that shop now, it will take the customers to our shop page. Nice. Now go to this style. First of all, open the topography. And for the font family, I'm going to choose just and font size only 16. Font weight keep it 400. and line height select em 1.5. And finally the later spacing make it minus 0.5. It'll be a little bit compact. Okay. Close the typography. And let's make the text color within it fully white. Just drag the knob all the way to the top and left. It will be 6F's code. So white. And I want to add a background color. So background uh type classic and background color let's type a code which is C39074 and you'll have this exact color. Now by default this button will have a default uh border radius a little bit rounded corner. So to turn that off make the border radius zero and the button will be fully sharp and have corner. Now using this inner padding of this button we can decide the size of the button. So let's unlink the button padding on the top 12 then 28 12 and 28 pixel. So overall shape will be like this. Pretty cool. Now we can actually add hover effects on button. Like here if you see if I take my mouse on this button this is being black like this. So we can add this kind of hover effects really easily. Go back to the elementtor and scroll up. We have this hover tab. If you switch to it, you'll have another options. For example, I make the text color fully red and the background color fully blue. Now if I take my mouse in here, the text is being red as this and background is uh being blue as this. Okay. Let's make the text color fully white and the background color fully black color. So on the hover it will be looking like this. Really cool. Now one thing left is we have we you need to place this button nicely on this image like this. So it is only possible by going to the advanced tab and making the position to absolute. After making making it position absolute, we can actually take this element anywhere by hand like this like put it anywhere in the screen. But we don't want to put it randomly. We want to make it precise. So scroll down. We have the horizontal orientation and vertical orientation. With the slide, we can set the exact placement. So first make the horizontal orientation left. Then make the offset to 72 pixel. It will be here. Then make the vertical orientation on the bottom and offset 136 pixel and the button will be exactly here. Looking really nice with this image. Okay. So on the left part one thing is left is this nice image. This is adding a little bit depth. So we can add that image exactly like this button. So click on the plus add an image widget. after this button. So the image will be here. Choose the image. Scroll down. Scroll down and you'll have this it'll be here. Now straightly let's go to the advanced tab and make it position absolute. And as you know you can put it anywhere with hand but let's make it precise. Horizontal orientation right offset 55. Then vertical orientation bottom offset 340 pixel. It will be exactly here. So with this our lipped part is fully done. This is looking like this. But of course if we close this panel we can see it in full screen. Although this is looking like this, this is not being full screen. We can fix it really easily. Open it. Go to the page settings. Scroll down and make the page layout element full width. After making it full width, if we now close the panel, everything will be full width matching with our targeted design. Right? Perfect. Now let's actually publish this page because we don't want to lose any progress we have made so far. Now if we go to our front end website which is this still looking like this right now because we haven't refreshed it. So let's if we refresh this page our front end website now it will be looking like this already looking really cool. Let's add stop on the right side exactly like this. So now let's focus on the right side. Let's uh move the structure on the lip like this. So under the banner section we are having a container right which is placed on the left side which is 50%. Right now we need another container like that just for the right side. So what I can do is right click on that container and click on add new container. A new container will be added right after that. Now also on the container make the width 50%. And this container will be using 50% and will be on the right side. Now let's go to the advanced make the padding. I'll make it first just on the left 138 pixel. So it will add 138 pixel on the left side. So it stays separated with this. Okay. Now inside this container, let's add a new container. And just for the sake of uh organization, I'm going to rename this font so you won't get confused by the same name. Okay. So, make the font uh content width boxed first. Then make the width 1240 pixel. Then make the min height first. Select this pencil icon which is custom. And on the min height just type 100%. So this container will must uh use 100% of the height. This banner section has just using 100% of the height. Okay. All right. Now inside this container, let's add an image widget. The image will be here first. Then choose the image from here. I'm going to scroll down and choose this image. This is called image- 7 webp. It will be here. By the way, select back the cont. Go to the advanced. Make the padding zero. And you'll see there would be no default padding within this container. If we didn't make it zero, you'll see it would be looking like this. But just make it zero to remove that. Okay. So, let's work on the image. We want to make the image exactly like this. So first go to the image style, make the width 450 pixels and height 580 pixels. And to fix this image, make the object fit cover and object position center. Now scroll down and unlink the border radius and on the bottom 250 and on the left to 50. So on the bottom side it'll be rounded. Perfect. Now let's go to the advanced tab and on the margin make it 28 pixel. Okay. Then after this image let's add a text editor here. Change the text to this. Go to the style. Make the typographies font family just font size 16. Weight 400. And finally line height 1.5. Close. By the way, I wanted to make the alignment center. So, it would be like this. And finally, make the color fully white. Okay. Now, scroll up, go to the advanced, and I want to add a custom width with this text. So, on the custom on the width, click on custom. And on the custom width, first make it pixel and type 450 pixel. Then make the size here custom. And by default the flex grow will be one and flex shrink will be one. And this text will be like this. Now after this text let's add a new container. And let's make the containers direction row justify content and align items end. And also make the gaps 44 pixel. Now inside it I'm going to add two images. First add this image here. Choose the image. So basically the image will be this one. So I'm going to scroll down and find this one. It'll be simply added here. But let's go with the style and decrease the width to 160 pixel. Then then the height to 62 pixel and make the object fit cover to fit it. And finally make the border radius 150 on the top and uh right. It'll be like this. And finally we're going to go to the advanced and do a magic here. If you scroll down and open the transform we have so many options but we need to use this rotate. And with the rotating and with the rotate we can you know rotate this image any how we want but I'm going to make it 20°. Okay. Image will be here. Now I'm going to add another image exactly like this. So instead of creating an image like this I'm going to right click on this existing image. Click on duplicate to have exactly the same one again. Now just change the image. Scroll down to this image. It'll be changed to this. Okay. Now the final thing just select the container. The container holding these two images. Right. Select the container. Go to the advanced. I'll link the margin on the top 20 pixel. And on the bottom make it minus 95 pixel. So it would be like this. Exactly like this. But the problem is this is the image is going outside of this container that is looking bad. So we have to hide this part. We have to hide this portion of the image. Right? And this is really really easy. Just select the banner section again. Go back to the layout. Scroll down all the way. Open the additional options. And under the overflow if we make it let me scroll down to here. If we make it hidden, the images extra part will be just hidden. Nothing can go outside of this banner section. Perfect. Now the final thing I'm going to add is this nice little images. So first after this container, let's add an image. Just select the container like this. And if we click on image, not drag and drop, the image will be right here looking ugly. But let's fix it. First, select the image. Scroll down. Scroll down. And you'll see this image. This is called star one. PNG. Now we have to make it absolute. So it takes no space. Scroll down here. Make it absolute. It'll be here. Then make the horizontal right offset minus 46 and vertical on the top offset minus 250 pixel. So the image will be here. If we close the panel it would be here. Okay. Now finally one more image. Just click on. Now the problem is the image is gone somewhere because one mistake is done here. This image is uh under this container but it should be outside of this container. So let's drag and drop this image outside of this container. And you'll see this image would be here. Now you can just keep this image anywhere you want after this container. But don't keep the image inside of this container. Okay. So the placement will be exactly here. Nice. Now let's add one more image. Duplicate this image and select image. Scroll down. You'll see this one. This is called star 3 PNG. And let's make it this is already absolute. But make the horizontal left offset minus 50 vertical bottom offset 150 pixel. And it'll be right here looking gorgeous. So if we compare our website to this, this is looking exactly same. But we can see this image is a little bit uplifted. So we can do the same. We can let's open it. We can select this image. We can go to the style. If we just little bit increase the height, it will be bigger. Let's make it 292 like this. And it'll be a little bit uplifted. Looking really nice. Okay. So overall we can say our banner section is looking done. It's looking really perfect. Now we're going to move ahead to our next section. But before that let's publish so we don't lose all of our hard work. So also in our front end website we can see the update. This is looking like this right now. Really perfect. Okay. Now I'm going to close this banner section. And right after that I'm going to add a completely new container and call this container categories section. So the category section will basically be this section where we show the categories and by clicking on that it takes us to the shop page of that category. So it'll be really nice and easy. So before we start to create our category section I'm going to show you the global settings. Global settings in the element can save a lot of time of making an website design and it's really easy. Just click on this element logo and click on side settings and it'll show many options but we need to work on just few of them. First go to the global colors and you can see some default colors like primary, secondary, text, accent. All of these color has different colors but we want to make it our own colors. Our website's own theme colors. Okay. So on the primary first I'm going to make it fully black. Then on the secondary I'm going to type a color code which is this C3 9 074. We have used this color earlier, right? So this using this color will be really easier than before. Then let's make the text color 6968 666. Okay. And finally I'm going to make the accent color same as the secondary color. So from here we can copy this color code and add it to the accent. Now I want to create some of more colors custom colors. So click on add color. I'm going to rename this white and click on choose color and make it fully white. FFF then click on add more. Then I'm going to make it I'm going to type the name transparent and from the color I'm going to make the color fully transparent by dragging the second slider all the way to the left. So the color will be transparent. Okay. Now the final color I'm going to be adding is called atomic. And the color code for this one will be this F29 766. It will be this color. Okay. Now click on save changes. Now from here click on the back button to go back. Now in the global fonts we're going to click on here. So the concept is same primary secondary text and accent but instead of default fonts like Roboto Roboto slab we're going to add our own most used font. Okay. So first I'm going to search just this is one of the most used fonts we're using. Now actually for the primary I'm going to search merciless. Select merciless and make the weight 400. This combination will be most used. Then close the typography. Then open the secondary. In the secondary I'm going to choose a font which is called libé baser vial. This is really weird sounding font. But trust me, this font is really amazing looking. Okay, choose this font and then open the text. This time select the jost font family. Keep the weight same and finally the accent. Keep the same joust font and just keep the weight 500. And that's it. Click on save changes. Go back. Now the next option we're going to go is in the typography and this typography will save us a lot of time. Let's go. We're going to set the typographies for body H1 H2 H3 for once and later we don't even have to work on the typographies anymore. Okay. So for the body body color click on the earth icon instead of the typing the color code and you'll see all the code all the colors we created. Right. So from here I'm going to ch choose the text and you see we didn't have to type the color code anymore. Then open the typography and the font family would be jo. So all of our normal text or the body text will have just font by default. Okay. Now scroll down. We have the H1. H1 is basically these I mean H tags are basically this heading text. Okay. So on the H1 I'm going to make the color fully black which is the primary. Then H2 make the same black. H3 black. H4 black. H5 black. And H6 black. Okay. Now after adding the color, let's add the typography quickly. Open the H1's typography. Make the family marcellus and make the size 64. Then weight 400 and line height 1.06 and later spacing minus 2 pixels and close it. Then open the uh H2 typography. But instead of opening, I'm going to first select the primary from here by clicking on the earth icon. Select the primary. And if we now open it, you'll see the Marcelus is already selected. Now just make the size 40, font weight 400, and line height make it 1.3 emm and also later spacing minus 2. This process can look a little bit lengthy, but trust me, after making or filling all of these presets, we won't have to select the typographies again and again for the design we're creating. Okay. Now after uh H2, make the H3 typography first. Select the secondary and you'll select this weird sounding font family but make the size 48 pixel and uh make the later spacing sorry not the later spacing line height 1.25 and later spacing minus2 makes it compact. Now make the H4 primary. Make the topography I mean size 20 and line height 1.2 and layer spacing minus 0.5. Close. And then second last H5. Select the primary and keep the weight 400. That's all. And finally the H6. Make the uh typography text and just make the font size 20 pixel and line height 1.5. Okay. Close the typography and that's it for the typography and you'll see the result. It will be really timesaving. Okay. Now save the changes from here and go back. Now skipping all the options. The last option we have to go to layout and first make the content width which is the width of the whole page or website make it 1240 pixel. We had to type manually this 1240 pixel width but this time I'm making it global. So we don't so we don't have to type this value again and again for every section. And then also with this container padding let's make it zero and we don't have to type zero at all again and again. Same for the gaps just make it zero and we are good for the global. Now scroll down one last uh setting will be the break points. In the break points we have desktop mode, tablet mode and mobile mode. But I'm going to click on this plus and add laptop mode. Okay. Now if we save click on save changes it will say you have made modification to the list of active break points. So you have to reload. So click on reload now and you'll see on the list alongside all of these the laptop mode will be added. We can see how the website is looking on the laptop mode. Okay. So basically our site settings is done. So we can click on the cross to close it. Okay. Now we may start our second section which is category section. And this is really easy and you'll see the result of the global settings. It will be really fast. Okay. Now let's work on the category section. First you'll notice the width is already 1240 pixel by the global settings. Now scroll down. Just make the direction row. And you'll also see the gaps are by default zero. But for just just for this section, I wanted the uh column 48 pixel. Okay. Now scroll up. Go to the advanced. I'll link the padding to add some space. Nice space within this section. On the top 120 on the right 30 120 pixel and 30 pixel. Okay. Now within this container, let's add one more new container. And we're going to make this containers width 50%. Then make the min height 6 40 pixel. It will be this long. And here I wanted to make the gap zero, but it's already zero. So it's really helpful. Now scroll up, go to this style, and let's add a background color for this container. I'm going to add a color code FFF7F3. and we'll get this nice deep beige color. Okay. Now go to the advanced link the padding on the top 68 on the right 60 zero then 60 pixel. Okay. Now we have to start adding the content like the heading button watch. Okay. So first let's add a heading. But you'll see the magic here. The heading is already styled for us. We just have to change the text. And here we can add beer quickly. The beer tag will break the text for us. Now you see it is having the exact style we are targeting. It's already styled because we did the global settings. We just have to add the text and it will be automatically styled. How cool. Now we just need to go to the advanced tab on the margin bottom 16 pixel. And now we have to add a simple button. So from here let's add a button first. Actually this button will be a little bit unique like this. It will it won't have any background just have an underline and an arrow. So first let's change the text to this. Browse the collections. Then we can actually add icons to the button. We can use the icon library and add any icons from the icon library. It will be added like this. But this time we're going to use our own icons. Click on upload SVG and click on enable unfiltered files. So if you have download the resources I have given in the images you'll find some SVG images which are in this browser icons. So I'm going to hold control and select all of them like this and drag and drop upload this in the media. These are actually all icons. Okay. So after uploading this will show a glitch or bug. It's showing just one icon. So to fix that click on the close of this pop-up, publish your uh page and refresh the whole page once. Then scroll down go back to the section here. here. Click on the button and then click on the upload SVG and then you'll see all the icons we have uploaded. So from here select this icon this right arrow. Click on insert media. It will be inserted in the button. But I want this icon on the other side of the button. So we can use this icon position to end. And let's add some icon spacing 33 pixel. It will be like this. Now let's go to the style. Now the typography is already accent. We don't have to do much. We just have to you see this is already selected as just family. We just have to make it 20 pixel and make the weight 400. That's it. Now let's make the text color. Instead of typing a color code, we can click on browser icon, I mean earth icon, and click on the text. The color will be like this. But we have to make the background of this button transparent. Exactly like this. So we can make the background color transparent by selecting this transparent color we have created and the background will be gone. Now let's add some styles like this uh border on the bottom. So we can use this border type make it solid and it will add a border around this button. But I'm going to unlink this border width and just on the bottom make it 1 pixel and also make the border radius zero. Then also make the padding zero but just on the bottom make it 2 pixel. Now we also can add border color. I'm going to make the same color as the text this. So overall this is looking like this. But I wanted to add a hover effect exactly like this. So we can first switch to the hover make the text color our accent or secondary color then also make the border color our accent or secondary color. So on the hover it would be looking like this. How nice. So this is how you make a transparent button. Now inside this box I'm going to add a final thing which is an image. Just drag and drop an image in here. Choose the image. I'm going to choose a product image. choosing this it'll be added here but I'm going to go to the style and just use the height make it 420 pixel also make the object fit content so it will be shown the image will show its full size it will not cover or cut the picture okay so I'm just going to publish and refresh the page now our left part is done we're going to add the right part quickly and it will be super easy. We can just duplicate this left part and change the text and images, right? It's super easy. So, we can select this container under the category section. Right click and duplicate. We'll have the exact same thing. Now, we can just go to the style of it, make the change the background color to fully black and the text is blending with the black. So, I'm going to change the text color to fully white color. And also change this button color. Click on the button. Go to style. Change the text color to accent color. And also border color to accent color. And the hover effect of this will be maybe this white. Okay. So hover text color white, border color white. So this is this. Okay. Finally, I'm going to change the image. Just click on the image and from here you'll find this image. This is called bg.webp. Select it will be first here. But we have to make it like this nicely. Okay. So first I'm going to go to style and remove this height. Okay. Then go to the advanced make it position absolute. After making it position absolute, this is overwriting all of the elements behind, but I'm going to fix it soon. But let's uh fix the placement here. Make the horizontal left offset zero, vertical, bottom offset minus 20. And now we have to select uh the heading. Go to the advanced tab. Scroll down. Make the z-index two. It will be over that image. Then select the button. Go to the advanced tab. Make the z-index two. It will be over that uh image. Okay. So al together this is looking like this. But we can see a problem here. This container is looking bigger than this container. We can fix it. We just have to give a height on this image. So on the height we can maybe make it 570 pixel on the height. And this will be just fixed. Perfect. Okay. So, we're basically done with this section. We have two section in our website now. Looking just gorgeous. You can add any link on this button just by just click on this button and go to the content and on the link add your link. Okay. Now, let's move on to the next section. This section will be really interesting. It will be our product section. in here will show our bestseller products. Okay. Okay. So, first let's take a new container in here and I'm going to rename this container product section one because we're going to have multiple product section in the homepage. So, the product one product section one will be this section. we're going to have will show some of our bestseller product in the homepage. Okay. And this section will be really simple to make. So first let's go to the style and add a background color for the whole section. So click on classic add a color. I'm going to add this color # FFF7F3. You'll have this dark beige color. Now go to the advanced. I'll link the padding on the top 120 pixel on the right 30 pixel on the bottom 120 and on the left uh 30 pixel. Now inside the product section, let's add a new container and let's make the containers direction row. Then justify content space between. I'm going to explain you why I'm choosing this uh space between then make the ele items center. And that's it for the container. Now inside this container, let's add a heading widget. Click on the plus. Drop this widget in here and change the text to best seller and make sure the HTML tag is H2 and the H2 is already styled in the global right so we don't have to style it at all. Now after the heading I'm going to add a button and I want this kind of button. So instead of creating from scratch, we already have this button on our homepage uh right here. So we can just grab this, just copy this one and paste it right after the heading. Make sure this is right after the heading and inside the container. And the button will be exactly here. Now let's uh I'm going to explain you how it's working. Why this button is all the way on the right? Because if we select the container, I already selected the justify content space between. So basically, if the space between wasn't selected, it would be like this, right? If you make the justify content start, it will be start. If you make it centered, it will be centered. If you choose end, it will be on the end. But space between makes all the content inside this container fully apart. It adds as much space it can between the items. Okay. So this is really helpful in the scenarios like this. Okay. Now let's move ahead. First container is done. Now I'm going to add another container by clicking on this container. Right click and click on add new container. It will be added here. and go to the advanced unlink the margin and just on the top 40 pixel so it adds a gap between this now I'm going to add a completely new kind of widget so click on plus and just search here short code and this is the short code widget drag and drop it here and using the short code we're going to show some of our products from our website Now we need the code here right we need the short code so to get the code just go to jifdigital.com we have come here earlier so if you scroll down you'll find this product short code for bestseller so just copy the whole line from here or click on this copy to clipboard go back and here just paste the code after pasting the code you'll see some products from our store will be loaded here and if we take Look at the short code. The product order is by popularity. Okay. Now we want to style the product section just like this. This is you can see this is styled nicely, right? It has a background color. It has a nice layout, right? So let's style our product section which is currently looking bad. Now to style the product section because we are using the short code. We want to use custom CSS. And to use custom CSS in the Elementor page builder free version, there's a trick. Just click on the plus and search for HTML. You'll find this widget. And let's add this widget all the way to the end like this. And it comes with a container. We can double click and rename this custom code just to organize it. Now from under the widget here we have to paste the custom CSS and and I already provided the custom CSS in the JFD website just and if you scroll down you'll find these codes. So we're going to use these codes to style our website nicely. So first you'll find this default entire page style CSS. So in order to add more CSS we must need this base CSS. Okay. So first I'm going to copy the whole code from here and go back. And now here before pasting the code I'm going to type less than style greater than and another style tag will be generated. So basically we're having a style tag. Now I'm going to leave some space in between the tags and inside the space inside of this tag I'm going to add or paste the copied code. After pasting, nothing will happen with the product because for the product there's a separate CSS code. So, scroll down and you'll find this product card style CSS. We need to copy this code. Go back and we have to paste this code before the style tag ends. Before the style. Okay. Uh leave a space here and uh paste that code. And after pasting, you'll see this card is having a nice style. After pasting the style CSS, currently this is looking like this. But we can style this further by customizing our theme. Customizing our theme that is controlling the style of this design. And we'll make the product section look like this. Okay. Currently, this is looking like this, but it's okay. So, our bestseller product is added. Our product section one is done. Now let's add another product section which will be based on featured products. Okay. So we can just right click on it and duplicate this thing because the product section two will be similar. Just we have to rename this product section two. And let's change the bestseller to featured product like this. And we have to change the short code. This was based on popularity. But let's go to back go back to the JFT and uh scroll up. You'll find this product short code for featured product. Just copy this line and replace this line with this. It will be based on featured products. Okay. Now you'll see the products are changed because this is based on different categories or different type of products. Now, you might be wondering how to make our products featured in our store, right? And it's really easy. You just have to go to the dashboard. Let's quickly uh see how to do it. So, to go to the dashboard, click on the Elementors logo. And from here, click on the exit to WordPress. I'm just going to open it on a new tab so we don't lose this page. Then, click here. And we'll be in our dashboard. Now let's go to our products. So you can make your products featured by just one click. Click on the star. And now this product is a featured product. Click on this star and this product will be a featured product. It's that easy. And you don't uh get to select the popular products because it is totally up to your customers which products gets more sales, which products gets more clicks. Based on that, the popularity based product will be shown here. Okay. But of course, the featured products selection is in your hands. Okay? So, I'm just going to deselect this one I showed you as an example. And I'm going to close the dashboard and go back to the Elementor. Okay, now let's continue. Okay, so basically our product sections are done. But we can see it actually needs a break point between these two section. By the way, you can see uh it's showing two or doubled products. It's a basic glitch. If you just go to the front end website and refresh, you'll see there's no glitch and it's showing only one product in a row. Okay, so it's a glitch. But as I was talking about, like it needs a gap or another section between these two sections, right? Because it's looking too flat. Like you're scrolling down through the website and you see this, it's actually looking bad. So to fix that, I already have a section template which I'm going to import. So it's really easy. So in here, just click on this plus and a gap will be added here. Now click on the folder icon. In here, you'll find so many pro templates, but we're not going to use pro ones. I have I have a really nice pro template for you for free. So go to the templates and if you have downloaded the resources you'll have two folders right we have used the images now go to the second uh folder which is template in the templates you'll find this thing this is called testimonial section dojson now we have to upload this click on this upload icon and simply drag and drop this file here click on continue and this will be added to the tab templates. Okay, now we're just going to click on this insert and it will be inserted in the element page builder and this is a testimonial section where people write about your products or your website whole experience. So you can change any images, any text from here. This is totally customizable. For example, we see this text is looking bad as a black color. So we can go to the style and make the color fully white. And like this. Oops, I clicked on the wrong button. Okay. So just like this, you can change anything you want from the background to images to any text. All right. So now, okay. Now if we publish and go to our front end website, refresh. Now if we scroll down like this, the transition is looking good. The second product section is at least one section apart from the first one, right? It totally makes sense. All right. Now let's move ahead and create another nice section which will be this this nice services section. Okay. So in here we can take a new container and close all other containers from here. Focus on this. I'm going to double click on it and rename this services section. By the way, we can see this custom code is laying here. So we can just drag and drop it under every section. So so it stays separated from our design. By the way, we cannot see this custom code. uh same as this in our front end website. In our front end website, there's no custom code like that. Okay. So, it's just for the building mode. Okay. So, now let's focus on the services section. First, go to the advanced tab only the padding on the right 30 on the left. Now, inside it, let's add a simple container. And first make the containers direction row and justify content space between and go to the style. We have to add a color. So click on classic and color. I'm going to add a code 262 C18 and it will add dark olive color. It looks really nice. Then I'm going to go to the advance tab and on the padding just add 48 pixel on all the sides. It will add a gap like this. Okay. Now inside this container, I'm going to add one more container. And let's rename this item because more item will be inside this container. So first on this item, let's make the width 30%. And that's it for the item. Now inside it, let's add a new widget which is called image box. drag and drop it inside the container. And image image box basically adds an image, a heading, and a paragraph. Okay. So, we're going to use it in our favor. We're going to change the image. Click on here. In the image, you'll find this image. It's called logistics PNG. Select. It'll be changed. Now, scroll down. Change the title heading to this worldwide delivery. And then finally description to this. Okay. By the way, if you notice I have added the BR in here to break the line here. So now let's go to the style. So first make the image position left. Then vertical alignment top. It'll be shaped like this. Keep the image spacing 15 but image I mean content spacing 8 pixel. Now open the image and make the width. Select the pixel first. 70 pixel. Then scroll down. Open the content to edit the typography in here. I'm going to add a custom typography. Select here. So the font size will be 20 pixel. And the font family is already selected. So close. Now for the color, I'm going to make it fully white color, which is this. Okay. And then let's edit the description, which is this. Open the typography. Just make the size 18. Family is already selected. So close. But make the color fully white. So it'll be looking like this. I think the typography is little bigger. This is looking much bigger than it should be. So we can make the size 16. And it's looking better instantly. Okay. So I have just added my first item in the box. Now instead of creating it from scratch, I can just select the item, right click and duplicate. I want three of them. So duplicating it twice. So I basically get three items. But I want to change some things on the item two. First the width it should be 40%. Then I'm going to open the style and open the border. I want to add border. So from the border type, select the solid and I'll link the border width and just on the right one and just on the left one. And let's add a border color. So I'm going to add this color code C39074. But I'm going to drag the second slider to the right like this. So the color should be semi-transparent. Not totally transparent but semi-transparent. Okay. So altogether this is looking like this here. But we need to add gaps here and here. Okay. So first go to the advanced the padding on the right 40 on the left 40 pixel. And this is looking like this. Now we need to add gap here. Select the third uh third item and un the padding just on the left 40 pixel and this will be looking like this. Amazing. Now we just have to change the text in here. So let's start with the second one. First I'm going to uh choose another image for this. So if you scroll down you'll find the support or consulting service image. Select and change the title. It says live support and change the description 24/7 live support. Click on this one. Change the image first. Select this. Change the title to this and description to this. And overall this is looking like this. Just perfect. Looking really cool. So we are done with our services section. And now we're going to create our block section. I'm going to show you how to do it easily. And we have a dedicated widget for that. So first let's add a container and rename this blogs section. And we can drag this custom code all the way to the end. Okay. So, first thing in the blog, go to the advanced tab and make the padding unlin. Then 120, 30, 120, and 30 pixels. Now, inside the block section, let's add a simple heading widget. Change the heading to our latest blocks. Now just go to the style and make the alignment center. Apart from that, we don't have to style the text. Just go to the advanced and leave some margin bottom 40 pixel. Now I'm going to add a completely new widget that is called blog posts and this is from elements kit plug-in we have installed. Okay. So let's drag and drop it here. And basically this will add blogs added in our website. This is showing some stock blogs or default blogs written. But later I'm going to show you how to write blogs for our website. For now let's work on these uh default or stock blogs and style this in our homepage. So first thing under the layout style select the grid with thumb and the blog list archive will be changed to this layout. Then keep everything as it is. Show the post per row three. Keep everything as it is but turn off this show content. Also turn off this read more. So this button will be gone. I want to show only the title from the bug. Then other thing I'm going to show you. So let's open the query. In the query, make the post count three. We want to only show three post from our website. From the select post by currently this is category, but we want to select recent post because we're showing our latest blocks, right? So, this will be showing the recent posts and keep everything as it is. Now, open the meta data. In the meta data, just keep everything as it is here, but make the uh meta position after title. And now let's add meta data from here. Click on this plus and we can add first date and the date will be added here the post date. Then click on plus. Add category. Category will be added here. By the way, this is currently unatategorized but it will be looking like this later when we create our real blocks. Okay. Then if you want you can show other things like author but I think it will be too much for the card. So I'm just going to remove the author from here. And that's it. Now I want to remove all the icons from items. Like I want to remove the date icons. So hover over this, click on the trash icon. It will be removed. Then from here click on trash icon. All the icons from the card will be removed and only the text will stay. Now we're done with the content. Let's go to the style and style this card nicely to make it look like this. Okay. So first I need to select a background color. Currently this is deep blue but I want to make it fully transparent. So select the transparent option. It will be gone. Now scroll down make the container border radius zero. So it no longer will have the b rounded border. And also I want to go to the shadows box shadow and want to remove the default shadows. So from the color if we make it fully transparent the shadow will be just gone. Then scroll down then make the container margin zero content padding zero. Then scroll down open the featured image make the border radius zero and padding zero. Then open the meta. First, I'm going to scroll down and change the color to fully black so we can see. Also, let's open the title first and make this color fully black. So, we can at least see the color now and style it. Now, go back to the meta and let's change the topography first. The size 4 pixel and the line height 28 pixel. And here, make everything zero. Container margin zero, item margin zero, but item padding unlink it just on the right. Make it 10 pixels. Then make the icon spacing zero. Also, we have the color here. Actually, let's make the color the text color. So, it'll be a little bit gray. And finally, make the border radius zero. Then, open the title to edit this title here. Open the title typography. Make the font size 20 pixel and line height 24 pixel. It look like this. And make the alignment left. And finally unlink the margin. Margin top 20 I mean 10 and margin bottom 10. So overall this is looking like this. But there is no image right now. You can see it should be showing the images. But there is no image. We haven't created the images or added the images in the blogs yet. Once we add or create our blogs, we'll add thumbnails for the blog and then in our homepage, the images will be shown nicely. So for now, I've just styled this blog posts. Later, I'm going to come back in the homepage and show you how to add images once we create our blocks. So for now, keep it as it is. So for now, our homepage is fully ready. We have added all the shake sections and styled it. It is looking really nice actually. Let's publish it and see it on the front end website. So overall from the banner our website is looking really gorgeous like this. We have so many sections. And lastly we'll fix our blogs of course. Now after the homepage I'm going to show you how to create our contact page step by step. I'll show you the contact page how it will look. So from my demo website, the contact page is looking like this. It will have a nice banner with an image. Then it will also have a Google map so you can locate your exact location if you have. Then here we'll add our contact details, our social media links, and also a contact form so customers can send us messages. Okay, I'm going to make I'm going to show you how to make it fully functional. So now let's go ahead in our dashboard from the element logo click on the exit to WordPress but make sure you save it or publish it so you don't lose the progress. Okay. So from here click on the WordPress. So we're in our pages again. So we need to create our contact page. Click on add page. And here I'm going to rename it contact and click on publish and publish. And then let's open the contact page in the elementtor page builder. And again we'll have an empty page. Now we're going to add our contact details. So first I'm going to add a nice banner for contact page. So we can take a simple container and rename this one page banner. Right now, first in the page banner, make the main height here to 56 pixel. Then scroll down, make the justify content center. Then go to the advance tab. Make the padding all 30 pixel. Also, I want to go to the style and add a background image for this section. So, click on classic and choose an image from the media. Scroll down. Let's scroll down and we'll find this image. This is called image 12 webp. Select this and it will be it will act like a background image for this container. So let's adjust this. This is looking bad right now. First thing keep the image resolution full. Then image position make it center. Then make the repeat no repeat so the image doesn't repeat itself. Then finally make the display size cover. So the image will cover this container nicely. Now I want to add a background overlay exactly like this. You see the in the background there is image but also an dark overlay. So how to add that? I'm going to show you. Open this background overlay. Then click on classic and add a color. I'm going to add fully black color. And you see this will be it's already showing the uh background overlay. Now using this opacity we can control the opacity of the overlay. So I'm going to make it 0.75 and it'll be like this. Nice. Now let's add content inside of this banner. So first thing I'm going to add a simple heading widget and first change the text to contact. Now I'm going to make the HTML tag from here h1. And we already styled the H1 in the global settings, right? So let's go to the style. We don't have to uh edit the typography. Just make the alignment center. So the text will be on the center. And of course change the color to white. So we can nicely see it. Now it's time to add this thing in here, this navigation. So for that I'm going to use a widget that is called icon list. Icon list. You will see this. add it here. And basically, it adds some list with icon. So, I'm going to close all of these and open the first one. On the first one, I'm going to type home and then remove the icon. We don't need the icon. Then, I'm going to uh duplicate the first one, make it three. Then, on the middle, add a four slash. Okay. Then on the last one add contact. So it will be looking like this. We're close to make it like this. Right now if we just make the layout inline it will be in a row. Nice. Now let's go to style and first make the space between 10 pixel. We can control the space between the items like this. Just make it 10. And make the align item center so it becomes on the center. Okay. Now let's open the text just from the typography. First make it the primary and make the size 14 pixel and line height 28 pixel. Close the typography and make the color fully white color. And it'll be looking like this. Nice. Okay. Now the banner is done. We're going to add the Google maps. Now it's really easy. So let's take a brand new container in this box and I'm going to rename it Google map Google map section and in the Google map go to the advanced first I'll make the padding make the top 120 then 30 120 I mean let's make it 30 and lastly 30 okay so space is done now I'm going to actually add the Google map widget. Just search for map and you'll see the Google map widget. Add it here and instantly you'll see the Google map is added like this and a random location is selected. Now you can change the location to your location. Just type your location here and that location will be selected here. You can set up the zoom how much you want the zoom. I want to make it 13. And you can set up the height here. Let's make the height 500 pixel. So it'll be longer. Now we want to make it gray shaded. Okay. So for that let's go to the style and we have the CSS filters. Open it. And here if we make the saturation zero and so it will be gray shaded. Nice. So this is our location. After that, I'm going to now add the contact details like how how to find us, contact number, exact location, email address, and social links. Then I'm going to add forms. Okay. So, we're going to make this this section now. So, let's take a fresh new container and call it contact section. So first in the contact section make the direction row and go to the advanced. I like the padding on the top 60 30 120 and 30 pixel. Okay. Now inside this let's add container and make the container width 50%. Because we want the first hub 50% like this then second half also 50%. Okay. And now let's go to the advanced un the padding on the right 20 pixel. Now inside of this container let's add a simple heading widget and change the text to how to find us. And make sure you select the HTML tag too and it'll be automatically styled. Nothing we have to do here. Now let's add a text widget. I mean text editor and change the paragraph from here. go to the style and make the text color our text color. Now we have to style it a little bit. Let's go to the advanced only the margin on the top 25 on the bottom 25. Then we need to control the width of this text. So from the width select the custom and we can control the width like this but I'm going to make it really precise. Select the pixel and make it 520 pixel. It'll be looking like this. Now we'll add these list like this. Contact number and addresses. So for that let's use icon list widget from here. Search icon list. Add it here. Let's remove all of them. First on the first one edit and add an number. Remove the icon. Then go to this style. Open the text and open the typography. Just make it 4 in pixel. That's it. And just make the color fully black. Now go to the advanced. Make the margin 10 pixel on the bottom. That's it. Now we can just duplicate this icon list. Duplicate. And duplicate one more. And edit this text to an address. And this text to an email address. Okay. Now after that let's add some social media links like this. It'll be useful. So from the plus search for social icons. You'll find this. Let's use the basic one. Add it here. This will add basically social icons. So first I'm going to remove all of these. On the first one I'm going to keep the Facebook icon. But here you can actually add your social media link. Just go to your social media. Just go to your Facebook account and paste that account link in here. And by clicking on this icon, it'll take people to your Facebook account. Okay. Now let's add Twitter. So just click on add item. Then from here we can choose icon library. Click on here. And we got the Twitter here. You can also search but we got it here. Actually, let's make it X because there are no Twitter anymore. There is X. So, select it and the icon will be loaded here. Now, after that, let's add one more and open. This time, I'm going to select the YouTube and you can paste the YouTube channel link in here. Okay. So, now first make the shape circle. It'll be like this. Then make the alignment left. It will be settled on a left. Now go to the style and let's change the uh color from official color to custom. And first on the primary color, select secondary. It will be like this. And here make the size 14 pixel. This is the icon size. And let's make the padding 0.8. Also make the spacing 10 pixels. And keep the rows gap zero. And now let's add some icon hover colors. So open the icon hover and on the primary color we can make it uh primary. So on the hover it'll be looking like this. Nice. So basically we have added the lift part perfectly. This is looking nice. Now it's time to add the second part which is the contact form. It will be really interesting. Let's do it. So I'm going to close the first container in the contact section and add a new container right after that. And also I'm going to make the width 50% for this one. Now first thing go to the advanced tab unlink just on the left make it 20 pixel so it stays apart 20 pixel with 20 pixel gap. Now, the first thing I'm going to add in here is a heading widget and change the text to ask anything. We don't have to style it at all. Now, after this, let's add a text widget. Text editor. Oops, I placed it on the wrong place. Undo. Just hit control + Z. The action will be undone. So, select that heading. Go to the plus again and click on the text editor and change the text to this. Place the structure on the left side now. So I want to make this text a little bit smaller. So go to the style, open the typography, make the size 14 pixel and line height, make it em first 1.5 em. Okay. Now go to the advanced tab and make the margin just on the top 28 pixel. It'll be apart. And now it's time to add the actual thing which is this amazing contact form. And we're going to use a widget which is called met form. Add this widget in here after this text. And it'll say no content is added yet. So on the left side we have to click on this edit form and something like this will show up. Now click on this new and we have to rename our contact form. Let's make it contact form one. So make sure after make sure you select the general form and make sure you select the blank template from here. Okay. Then click on edit form and a tiny element page builder will open up and it will open the form creation place and on the sidebar we can see the mid form plug-in is opened with all the widgets that will help us to build a contact form. All right. So first thing we're going to add is a box. So if we close the mid form the basic layouts will come up like the container grid and all. So instead of container this time I'm going to use the grid. Let's add the grid here. So grid basically adds a layout with few boxes like row and column. By default it's two rows and three columns. Okay. And the grid will really help us to make layout like this. You see in a single row there are two columns. So let's go ahead. First let's set up the grid here. Just keep everything as as it is here. Now scroll down. And we have the columns three but we want the uh columns two. And let's make the rows one. Keep the rows one for now. And also I want the gaps 30 pixels. So it will add uh 30 pixel gaps in between. And that's it for the grid. Now inside the grid, let's add items. So on the first uh row and on the first column, I'm going to add let's open the midform. Now I'm going to add a text widget. So a text widget will come with this input. So let's turn this input into this nice your name input. To do that, first we're going to hide this default label. So click on here. It will be hidden. Then on the name instead of this mfen text I'm going to make it mfen name. Then on the placeholder instead of this text which is showing here I'm going to type your name and scroll down go to the settings and it should be required in order to submit a message. Uh the user must have fulfilled this name input. Okay. And if you want you can uh change the warning message if the user doesn't put the value in in this field. What should be the warning message? By default this is this field is required. I'm going to show you what it happens. You see if you don't put anything it'll say this field is required. Okay. After that let's go ahead and style this input. So first thing is skip all of these and open the input. And first unlink the padding. Let's resize this input using padding. So first 12 16 12 and 16 pixel. Then scroll down. Keep the input color black color. And I don't want any background on this input which currently has. So I'm going to click on background type classic. And color I'm going to make it fully transparent. So it won't have any background anymore. Then scroll down. I want to add a border. So on the border type, select solid. And border width, make it 1 pixel. Then from here, let's make the border color. I'm going to type a code. Just add 6D 1 2 3 4 5 6 like this. And we'll have a nice gray background. I mean a gray border color. Then scroll down. Let's edit this typography a little bit. Let's just make it 14 pixel. And line height. Choose em 1.4 em. Okay. Close it. Now I'm going to edit this text. This is under the placeholder here. So first the typography should be same but 14 pixel and the line head should be 1.4 em. Okay. And also the text color I'm going to make it our preset text color. So uh let's click on here and we can see this text here. Select it and it will be exactly like this. This is looking like this right now. Exactly like here. Okay, we're done with the name. Now we have to add an email input on this column, right? So we can click on this plus and scroll down here. You'll see or just search for email like this. You'll see this email from made form MF. Now just add it here on the second column. The input will be here. So from here, let's hide this label. And on this placeholder, I'm going to just type your email and put a star like this. It's showing it's important or required. So let's go to the setting and make it required. And for the style, instead of doing the style from scratch, we can just copy the first text and paste the style. not paste. Paste the style on here and it will adopt the same style as this one. You see this is cool. Okay. After this email input, we have to add this website URL input and it the midform has dedicated widget for that. So from here if you search URL, you'll find this one just added after this or just click on it. It will be added on the second row, first column. And click on show label to hide it. And in the placeholder, I'm going to make it uh your website. Okay, the input is asking for the website URL. Okay, now for this one as well, I'm going to copy the style from this one and paste the style to this and it will adopt the same styling. Now if you see this website URL input is longer or using the full width unlike these ones. Okay. So what I'm going to do with it is go to the advanced tab and it has a new option which is grid item and I'm going to make the column span two from here. So this input alone will take two column space like this. Okay. So it'll be longer or using full width. Okay. So this is done. Now I'm going to add this thing this message input. So for that there is also a dedicated widget which is called this text area. Add the text area in here. Turn off the label and in the message or first on the name it should be saying mfen message oops message. And in the placeholder, I'm going to type message. Okay. Now, I'm going to copy the style and paste the style in here. So, it'll add up the same styling and the same width. Now, you can go to the style and control the height of the text area like this. So, I'm going to make it 105 pixel. And overall, it should be looking like this. Nice. And now it's time to add the final thing which is a submit button. It says get in touch. So we cannot add a simple button because this is fully functional. So we got to add this submit button from mid form. Okay. Add the submit button somewhere here. It will be added to the fourth row. I'm having trouble to drag and drop it here. So we just click on here and it'll be added here. Okay. So we have to style it nicely. First it will say get in touch and let's make the button alignment left. Now let's quickly style this button. Go to the style tab. First make the uh buttons padding 12 28 12 and 28. Scroll down. Make the text color white. Then background type classic and background color. Let's make it our accent color. And also scroll down. Open the border. First of all, remove the border radius. We don't want that. And by default, it's also having a shadow. As you can see, we want to remove the shadow. So, open the shadow. Open the box shadow. And from the color, if you just make it transparent, it will be hidden. So, we have made our button perfectly. So, our mid form design is done. Now, from here, I'm going to click on publish. And it's published. And if we just click on update and close, the whole form will be added inside of this container. And looking like this. Amazing. And now I'm going to quickly show you how to make that uh form fully functional. It's actually automatically functional. You just have to set up according to your preferences. So from here I'm going to click on edit form again. And from here I'm going to choose the contact form one which which we have created right now. So click on edit open. Then from here on the top click on this form settings. And we have so many options but we just to work on a few of them. So we can first go to the confirmation. You can turn on this confirmation mail to user. Turn on this if you want to send a submission copy to user by email. You can edit the email subject. You can uh edit the email from that which in from which email address the submission copy will go. For example, I make the email subject wristy support team. So this subject is indicating that this is from wristy support team. This is our website name and the email from let's say it's [email protected]. And if you want you can add any thank you message. You can write anything you want here. Okay. Now the most important thing. Let's go to the notification. This is notification mail to admin. Turn this on if you want to send a submission copy to admin by email. So if any user sends a message using their name, email, website address, then the message a submission copy of all these information will go to your account or your email address. So the email subject can be like wristy customer message. You'll receive this email and the subject will be this and this. This is mail to. So here we have to enter the email the admin email where you want to send the mail. For example, you you have an email address which is this. So the submission copy or the message and user sends will be sent to your email addresses you put here. Okay. You can add multiple email addresses like add an email address then put a comma then add another email address. Okay. So this is the basic settings you need here and you should be good here. But if you want to see an advanced tutorial on just for form settings, let me know in the comments. I'm going to make a complete advanced tutorial for this topic. Okay. So we're good for now here. So let's close this popup and click on update and close. So now our contact form is fully functional. If any customer sends message, we will receive the message through our email addresses. Nice. Now we basically created our contact page. Also, we have created our homepage. But one thing we have missed is making our whole website responsive. Let's go back to our homepage. But before let's publish. So we can actually open our homepage right from here. Click on the contact and from here click on home. And our home will be in the element page builder. Now this is a desktop screen, right? So in the desktop screen, this is looking like this. Perfect. Nothing to do. But people will open our website on different screen sizes like laptop, tablet, mobile. And as you can see on from the tablet, our website is started to look really ugly. Everything is almost messed up. And it's even messed up on a mobile devices. You see it's looking really ugly. So we have to make it fully fully responsive. And it's actually really easy. It's not anything hard. We just have to do it. Okay. So let's open the panel. So this is desktop mode. But if we go to the tablet mode, we can see this is not really bad. Everything is not looking like bad or something. This is actually perfect for the laptop mode. Desktop and laptop is okay. Okay. But once we go to the tablet mode, everything start to look really bad. So let's fix the banner section first. It will be easy. First, I'm going to open the banner section and select the container, first container, and go to the advanced tab. And I'll link the padding just on the top. Keep 130 pixel. It decreased the space in here. Then let's decrease the font size of this beak text. So go to the style and make the size a bit 42 pixel and it'll be looking perfect. Now, now let's fix this thing. This is looking really ugly. So first select this image, go to the style, make the height 372 pixel. It will be a little bit shorter. Then let's select this button and go to the advanced. And we can fix the pattern really easily like this. So put the offset here 210 pixel and this offset 120 pixel. And it will be fixed later once we fix all of these. The height will be adjusted. Now let's focus on the right side. First of all, select the second container inside of this banner section. And if we go to the advanced tab, we'll see there is so much high margin here. I mean high padding here on the left. So first make it zero and make it 30 pixel. So it'll be looking like this. Now let's select this big image which is really having some height. So let's decrease the height from here. Just make it 380 pixel. Now the tablet mode is just looking perfect. And of course you can just drag these little images here and there to make it look perfect. Okay, it's good. Now let's go to the mobile mode. Okay, by the way, we can see here this is looking bad like it's having extra space. We can see white color here. So select the banner section and make the width make it person first. Make the width 100%. So it'll cover 100% of it. Okay, so the tablet is perfect. Now let's go to the mobile mode. And again, everything will be messed up so much. But the fix will be really really easy. Just trust me. So first select the banner section container and go to this style. First we have to flip the angle of the gradient. So here on the angle make it 180 pixel and the location the first location make it 53. The second location 50 and it will be flipped like this. Okay. The beige color part would be on the top and the black color will be on the bottom. Exactly how we want. Then we can move this little image somewhere here. Oops, it's gone here. So, we have to actually precisely place it using these sliders. Just put it somewhere here. It'll stay. Okay. Then also grab this button. Put it somewhere here. or just precisely make the value 210 on the horizontal and 120 on the vertical. Make the offset 50% on the top and 120 pixel on the vertical. The button will be here. Then select the image and make the height 380 pixel. It will be a little bit longer. And also select this uh text editor. And decrease the margin like make it zero. Zero is also not zero actually. Let's make it 30 on the bottom. This looking good. Yes. Now scroll down. Select this container. The second container inside the banner. This one. And remove the left padding. Make it zero. And this is looking like this right now. But we have to fix this. Select this container after the text editor and go to the layout. And by default in the mobile mode, it has been broken into two rows. But if we make the wrap no wrap, it will be fixed again. And it will be in a single row. Now the mobile mode is just perfectly fixed. As you can see, we have cleverly adjusted the mobile screen like this. Can you believe the desktop mode was this complex? And we have made it through the laptop, tablet, and the mobile. This is really good. Okay, now it's time to fix the next section, which is this. In the laptop mode, this is looking perfect, but in the tablet mode, this is looking like this. And the fix is really easy actually. So first thing open the panel and select the category section. Go to the advanced un the padding. Now let's decrease on the top 75 then 30 75 and 30 pixel. And now directly going to select this the container under the category section first one. Then go to the advanced only the padding. On the top keep 60. On the right make it 30. On the bottom keep zero. And on the left 30. And also let's uh select the text here. Decrease the font size. Make it 36 pixel. It'll be perfectly fixed. And also select this button and make the font size 18 pixel. And it'll be perfectly looking fine. But we have to decrease the image height from here like this. Make it this. And of course we have to select the container and decrease the main height from here. We cannot see the decreasing because the other container is here. So just make it like this for now. 420 pixel. And select the second one actually. I'm going to copy this one and paste this text style in here. Copy this one. Okay, don't copy this one because the color is different. Just make the font size of this button 18 pixel. And also select this container. Make the padding I mean make the min uh min height 420 pixel. And now we can see the decreasement of the container. But I think it has decreased too much. So let's make it 450 pixel. And also select this container. Make it 4 50 pixel. And let's again select the second container and decrease the padding. Top 60 right 30 z and 30 pixel. It will be fixed. But we have to select this image. Go to the style. Decrease the image height like this. Just make it 400 pixel. And we can see again it's overlaying our text or heading. So select the heading, go to the advanced, make the Z-index to it'll be over that image. So the tablet mode is perfectly fixed. But I want more. I have to decrease the gap between this. So we can select the category section in the layout. Just make the gap on the column 30 pixel and it will be even better. And for the mobile mode, the fix is really easy. It's all almost automatically fixed. We just have to decrease the font size. Decrease the font size to 29 pixel and this font size to 16 pixel. That's it. Now select this one. Make the font size 29. This one font size 16. And finally select the image. Decrease the high a little bit like this. And also select the category section. And no longer we need the gap on the column. Make the column gap zero. And make the row gap 30. So we'll gap we'll add the gap here. Okay. So now this section is fully responsive for all the screens. Perfect. And for the product section we can see this is almost fully responsive automatically. Actually this is automatically responsive. We don't even have to do anything. But we can still fix this thing a little bit here. So select the container product section one decrease the padding 75 on the top then 30 75 and 30 pixel then select this thing this heading margin bottom only 10 pixel and we can decrease the font size a little bit like make it 36 and this buttons font size make it 16 pixel and everything is perfectly fine and we'll fix these on the customization as we know. Okay. And this testimonial section is already automatically responsive because we have imported this section. Okay. Now do the same for this product two section. Select the section product two section. Decrease the padding on the top. 75 30 75 30 and this heading make it 36. And this go to the advanced margin bottom 10. And select this decrease the size 16 pixel. Okay. Now this is looking perfect in the mobile mode. Now we have this section here. This will be easy to fix. So first in the laptop mode we just have to decrease the text sizes and all. So from the style go to the content, open the typography and decrease it to 18 pixel close it open the description typography decrease it to 14 pixel. Close it and just copy the item and paste the style and paste the style. it will be automatically fixed. But this is looking bad here. So we can decrease the padding a little bit here. Go to the advanced only the padding. Make it 20 pixel. So the padding will be like this. Okay. It'll be fixed. Perfect. For the tablet uh laptop mode. Now in the tablet mode this is looking like this. All you got to do is again fix it. Now select this container under the services section and decrease the padding to 30 pixel. And now let's select the image box again. Open the content. Decrease the typography. Make it 16. And make the description size 12. Now copy and paste the style here. Copy and paste the style here. Now what I can do here is select the uh second item. Decrease the padding here. to 20 pixel on each side. And what we can do is actually remove the border. The border is making it looking bad. So go to the style, open the border and make the border width zero for the mobile mode and it will be just fixed. Okay. Now for the mobile mode, this is this will be so easy. It's all automatically fixed as you can see by making it column. But we have to add some gaps between the items. So select this container parent container of this uh single items. Go to the layout and if we make the gaps 20 pixel it will be fixed. Actually let's make it 30 pixel. Okay. And now if you want you can also bring back the border on the second item. Make the unlink the border. Make the border one, I mean border top one and border bottom one. The borders are back. We can also add padding. Go to advanced. Instead of padding left and right, add padding top and bottom. And it'll be perfect like this. And also on here we have uh this padding over here. So just make it zero. It'll be centered. Perfect. Now we have our last section which is our block section as we cannot see any images or anything. We cannot see that this is automatically fully responsive once the image is added. Once we create our blocks page we'll be able to see it will be fully responsive automatically. Okay. So basically our homepage is fully responsive for uh laptop mode, tablet mode and mobile mode. Perfect. Now let's go ahead and quickly uh responsive our contact section or contact page. It'll be easy because it doesn't have so many uh sections, right? So first I'm going to select the banner page and let's see how it looking on the laptop. It's looking perfect on the laptop. It's looking almost perfect on the tablet mode. Just we have to go to the style and decrease the main height. Make it 190 and select this heading. And let's decrease the font size a little bit like make it 47 pixel. That's looking perfect. Now let's select the Google map section and decrease the padding margin uh padding top 75 and bottom. Just keep it as it is. This is looking good. Now this is this area is already responsive. So uh I'm going to select the contact section and remove the padding and just on the top let's make it 75 pixel and it'll be just perfect. Now in the mobile mode it will be automatically fixed almost. We just have to uh fix some things like adding space in here. We can simply select this first container on the bottom. We can add 30 pixel and it should add a gap. Then select the second container. Remove the padding left from here. And now we have to fix this form. Let's go inside the form. Open the form in here. And inside the form element as well, switch to mobile mode. And this is looking like this. Now I'm going to select this uh text first. Go to the advanced and make the column span two. So it takes full space as you see. And select the email. Then do the same column span two. And finally the this button. Let's do the same. Make the column span two. So it takes full space. And also with this button what I'm going to do is make the button alignment justified. So it'll be full like this. Okay. Now click on publish and update and close. Now in the mobile mode this is looking just perfect. Our contact is looking perfect. Nice. So we can say our whole website is okay. So here I want to do one last thing. I'm going to select the Google maps and decrease the height a little bit like this. Just make it 400 pixel and it's perfect. So you can say our contact page is fully perfect. Our whole website is uh fully responsive and perfect. And now before I start customizing our header, footer and the shop pages, I'm going to show you how to create blogs for your website. For that, let's go back to our dashboard. Then click on this WordPress icon and we'll be in our dashboard again. Now to create blogs for our website, we have to go to the posts option. Click on here and we're having some random blog posts. So what I'm going to do is select all of the blogs including this default one from the bulk action. Click on move to trash and apply. All will be deleted. And I'm going to show you how to create a blog from scratch fully freshly. So from here, click on add post. And this is the blog creation area. This is almost looking like the page creation. But in here we can add a blog title like this. This is a title for my blog. Now in this area we can type any text we want. And this is a fully rich text editor means we can select any portion of the text and make it stylized like make it bold, make it itallic, even make it a link. And it also has a widget option. It has so many widgets. Just click on this plus and you'll see it has so many many kind of widget like paragraph, heading, code, verse, images, gallery, audio, video. Then here we have this calendar, social icons. Literally anything you can imagine in a blog. It has all. Then if we go to the patterns, it has so many pre-built presets. Like in the banners, you can grab any design just by dragging and dropping here. Then from the blocks, let's say I want to add an image in here. Just drag and drop the image widget here. Click on this upload or select media library. Add any image you want and the image will be added here. Then you can resize the image any how you want like this. So overall, this is a complete blog builder. And now I'm just going to delete all the examples tab and add my own written blogs. Okay, I have deleted. Now I'm going to add my blog. Okay, I have added this blog with this image in here. Now I can close this widget option and open this sidebar from the right side. Now in here we have some options like text. You can change the text color, background color, then default font size. But I prefer this default thing. This is good enough. Now if we switch to the post, we have other options really important options like set featured image which is thumbnail for the post. So you can click on here and scroll down. I select this one as a thumbnail of this whole blog post. Then we have all this metadata status, publish, slug, author name. As you can see, this is my author name. You can change it from the dashboard. I earlier showed you how to do that. After that, we have the categories tags. We can add new category like trending watches. Type here and click enter to add as a category. it'll be selected. Then you can add tags like women's watch trendy like this. This is almost like creating a product, right? So after giving enough informations for my blog, I'm going to click on this publish and publish again and my first blog for the website will be published. Now we can click on this view post and this will take us to the single blog post where I can read the whole blog with all the information and details and also if anyone wants they can actually leave message or feedback for this blog post just like this. And as an admin, you have total control of any comments people do in the blog posts. Like if you go to the dashboard, go back to the dashboard. If you go to the comments from the left side, you'll see all the comments people going to do on the blog post. Also, you can uh view the reviews on products in the same place as the comments. So from here, you can unapprove this or delete that if you want. and the review or the comment will be deleted. Okay, so this is our blog single blog post. This is looking like this for now. But of course, we're going to customize it to make it look even better. But now we have to build a blog page, a dedicated page for the blog lists. So now I'm going to go back to the blogs or the posts. Currently we're having only one post you can see but I'm going to quickly come back after adding more post like this. The creation the post creation is exactly same I have showed you. So without wasting time I'm going to add some blocks and come back. Okay I have add all the blog post for my website. Now our website will be fulfilled with blocks. All right. Now we need to create a dedicated blog page where we can show the blog lists all the blog lists right so for that let's just go to the pages and create a new page click on add new page name it blog oops blog publish publish and now we have to tell our WordPress that this is our official blog page page. So for that scroll down on the left side and under the settings just go to the reading and just like we have selected homepage or home as a homepage select the blog page as a posts page. Okay. Then click on save changes. Now let's go to our front end website. Now from here after our domain name if we type forward slash blogs and we can see here our blog page where all the posts are shown in list like this. Although this is looking like this looking actually bad but in the customization we'll customize our blogs page really nicely. Okay, now it's time to do the really important thing which is customizing our header and the footer. Because in the header we really really need our menus. So we can navigate through our pages. We need links like home, about, contact, shop, blogs, all the links on the header. Right? So for that we have to create menus. To create menus go to the dashboard and from the left side under the appearance you'll find this menus option. Okay. So here first we have to rename our menu. I'm renaming it main menu and click on create menu. But before that you can select this primary menu and click on create menu. Now we have to add links to our main menu. So from the left side click on this view all. And we can see all of our pages like home, blogs, cart, checkout, contact, shop, all of these. So first I'm going to select home then blogs contact shop and we can also select wish list since the wish list is not in the header but we have my account and cart on the uh header already so I'm not selecting those just select home blogs contact shop and wish list now click on this add to menu and this will be added to menu. Now from here we can drag and drop and reorder the links. So I'm going to put the shop page right after the homepage. Uh home shop blogs then maybe wishlist and then after contact at the end contact. Okay. Now this way I'm going to save the menu. Now after saving the menu if we go to our front end website and refresh we can see the menus are automatically added. This is looking like this. But of course in the customization we can customize it perfectly. So overall we can click on this my e-commerce website and it basically takes us to the homepage. So it basically looking like this. Now I'm going to show you how to fully customize our website from the header to footer then blogs to shop pages. And to start customizing we can go to our dashboard from here from under the appearance we can click on customize and the customizing interface will come up here. So here we have so many customization option but each of them are super easy to do. First we can go to the site identity. In here we can select our official logo for the website. Then if we scroll down here we can select the site icon. The site icon is basically the icon which shows with the tab. Right? Just like in the gym digital is showing the site icon this now we can select our own side icon. But before that let's select our logo. Click on the select logo. So from our media library let's look for the logo. So I got the logo here wristy and click on select and from here click on skip cropping. I want the whole logo shown here and here the logo will be set. And if you want you can select higher resolution uh logo for retina displays or mobile logo smaller logos or images for the mobile devices but I'm totally okay with this. So now let's go ahead and select a site icon. So in the media, I'm just going to upload my own fab icon or side icon and just select it without cropping. Skip cropping. And you see instantly our tab icon has been changed to this W. Now we can click on publish. And we're done with our site identity. So let's go back. Now we can go to the layout. The layout there is so many option but we don't have to do much. First we can go to the site uh container and make sure the width is 1240 pixel like this and keep the background color white. Keep the background image uh default and just publish. Keep everything default and publish. Go back. We can go to top bar actually keep just just keep everything default. skipping all of these, we can just directly go to the blog and let's also go to the blogs page and we can see the layout here. So the layout is currently selected as this but I want it to be like the first layout. Now I think this is looking much much better. So this is our blogs list page. Now we'll uh add some widgets on the sidebar in here. Don't worry about this. Now here you can tweak the things like the blog list structure first. There is featured image which is this. Then there is title which is this. You can just tweak it like reorder it if you want. You can put the meta data before the title. I think this looks even better. So I'm going to keep it like this. Now publish. Let's go back. Now let's go to the single blog. In the single blog let's open a blog to see. So first I'm going to put the meta data before the featured image. So all the date and author names then categories will be before the cate I mean featured image. And here also if you want you can hide the featured image if you think the image is looking really big unnecessarily big. So I'm actually going to hide the featured image from here. Just keeping the single block. Okay. Publish. Now let's go back. Now we have the sidebar here. So you can decide where you put the sidebar. So from the right side, I'm going to make it left side. I want my sidebar to be on the left side in the single blog or whole the in the whole blog. Let's go to the blog and see. You see in the blogs as well the sidebar is on the left side. And you can also decide in the blog list whether there is sidebar or no sidebar. If you select no sidebar, the sidebar will be gone from here. Or if you want to select the right side in only blog list, the sidebar will be on the right side. I think it it's looking better on the right side for the blog list. It's making the page fulfilled, right after we have the shop product archive. So you can decide on the shop page. Let's go to the shop page. And we can see there is also a sidebar. You can decide where you want to show the sidebar for the uh shop or product archive page. So this is by default on the left side. I'm keeping it on the left side. Then here on the shop single, let's uh open the shop single. This is called a shop single. So by default there is no sidebar in the shop uh single. But if you want you can add a sidebar like this. But I actually prefer no sidebar in the single shop or product page. Okay, let's go back. Now we have the footer. In the footer, we almost have nothing in the footer except of this copyright text. But in the widgets column, I'm going to select three. So in the footer, there will be space left to add widgets or elements in the footer. Just like this. You see actually here 1 2 3 four column is there. So I'm going to make it make the widget columns four. So we can add four columns for items. And also from here you can change the copyright text like this is right now saying copyright 2025 my e-commerce website. You can't uh change the text from here but I do not recommend to change these things. This is fully functional. It says current year. If it's current year, it will show the current year in here converted. And this is if this is site title, it will show the site title in here. But of course, you can change this from here. But instead of changing it from here, I'm going to change the site title directly from somewhere else. Okay. But on the part by here, I'm going to type rristie my website name. Or we can just remove the whole powered by thing like this. And later we'll change the my e-commerce website text to our website name. Okay. Now publish. Go back. Now we have this scroll to top button, right? By clicking on it, it takes us on all the way to the top of the page. So you can little bit customize that as well. So in the design you can change the background color to any color I guess like this. So I'm going to add my accent color which is the secondary we have created in the global settings right or select the accent color. So it will be changed to this nice you can change the icon size border radius of this and offset bottom like this. I'm going to keep it somewhere here. Okay. Okay. Now, let's go back and it's enough for the layout, I guess. Now, going back from the layout. Now, you can go to the colors. In the colors, we just have to change the uh main colors in here. Four colors. Right now, everything is looking blue, gray, black, and blue, right? like from buttons to hover effects on the menus everything is based on these four colors. So I'm going to click on here and add my own theme colors. So first on the theme color I'm going to make it this color and you'll see the hover effect on the or active effect on the page links will be changed. Nice. Then let's change the text color. Add this color for the text. And then link or accent color. Let's make it this color. And finally link hover color. Change it to this color. Okay. So many color has been changed but this color hasn't changed yet. The button one. But the button color option is somewhere else. I'm going to show you later. But everything else's color has been changed to our own color. Nice. You see? All right. Now publish and go back from the color. Now we have this buttons. So in the buttons we can change the background color now. So I'm going to select this theme color. This is called theme color. And the button color will be changed to this or you can change it to this. I'm going to keep it this. Okay. Then you can uh select the border radius. I'm going to actually make it zero as our homepage design makes all the buttons border radius zero. Now it's good. Now let's go back. Then we have the typography. In the typography, make sure every font you select is either Helvetica like this. Then go back, open the primary menu. Primary menu color should be our own Marcela's font family. And you'll see this will be changed. Right? This looking much much better. And we can of course tweak the uh font size here. So I'm going to make it 16 pixel. It'll be a little bit bigger. Then we can make the line height a little bit smaller like 20 pixel. So the header the whole header would be a little bit shorter. Okay. Looking nice. Now here we can make the sub menu size 14. Later I'm going to show you how to add sub menus. Okay. Now publish and go back. Now we have the heading. In the heading again choose the Marcelus and here make the line height 1.2. Then here the rest keep everything as it is. Okay. Now publish and go back. We're done with the typography. Every text is looking good. Now it's time to go to the oocommerce. So first I'm going to go to the product catalog and you'll see it'll take us here. So just keep everything as it is default and but make sure you make the product per row three. So it'll show three products per row. But you can of course change it to four and four product will be shown like this. But I prefer three product per row. And you also able to select the product per page. Currently this is 12. So 12 products is showing in a single page. If you want you can make it eight. And now if we go to the shop page in the front end website, we can see only eight product been showing here and the rest of the product is in the second page like this. Okay. So let's go back to the customization and we're good with the product catalog. Now we can go to the product images. Actually in the product images keep everything as it is. all the ratio, all the thumbnail width and all. Just keep everything as it is because everything is looking good. Now we can go to the sharp archive which is this page and here in the general make sure every every option is selected shop title breadcrumb result count product filtering and turn this out of stock product button off. Then we can open the product card and keep the border style none. And we can open the product content and make it left. And you'll see all the product content will be settled on the left. Now in here, turn on the product title. Turn off the product category. If you turn it on, the product category also will be shown like this. But I think it's too much for the product archive. So turn this off. Just turn on the product rating. The rating is not there yet because the product hasn't been rated yet. Then show the product pricing, turn up the product quantity and equal product content. Okay. Now we can go to the product image and you can uh select the kind of animation when you hover over any product. Like currently if you hover over on it, it swaps the image into a gall gallery image. But if you want you can select it, zoom and publish. And now if you see on hover the product will just zoom. Actually I prefer this one better more. So I'm keeping the zoom effect. Now we can make the equal image height. Actually it's better if you have different ratios of image. You can turn this on. So the image all the image height will be equal. And let's make the image height 320 pixel. It will be a little bit longer. Okay. Now we have the sale tag. Sale tag is this. How much discount is you are getting on this product which is on the left side. And you can also change the text. Like if I turn off this sale percentage, you'll just say sale sale. And you can say change the sale text, but I prefer the sale percentage shown here. Now, let's uh change the background color of the sale tag. Click on here, and I'm going to choose the secondary. It's looking nice. Now, scroll down. We can open the wish list button. So, it setups where the wish list you want to show. Like right now, the wish list is on the top right. I think it's the good place to keep the wish list. So I'm going to keep as it is. Now this is add to cardart button. This is important because this is looking like this really bad right now. We have to fix it. We can choose from many uh add to cutart button style. Like if you choose this add to cut button will be always shown like this. But now this is hidden and by hovering you can see the add to cardart. Actually this is better. But I'm going to customize it further to make it look really good. Okay. So I'm just going to keep it the second one, the hidden one. It will be always hidden but on hover it will be shown but it will be nice later. And here you can turn on or turn off the card icon which is this. I'm going to turn it on. Now this is enough for the what is called this shop archive. So I'm going to publish. Let's go back. And this is now single product. Let's go to a single product. Okay. So here make everything turned on all of these options. Then open the product images. So this is the layout of the gallery. Actually let's open another uh product with gallery enabled. I think this has gallery. Yes, this is having gallery. So you can change the style of the gallery shown here. So this is one style. This is one style like this. And this is another style. But you know what? I actually love the first one. So I'm keeping uh keeping the layout of the gallery first one. Currently this is here the sale button and the wish list button has messed up. I'm going to really quickly fix it later. For now, just keep it. Now scroll down. If you open the product data tabs, you can reorder the data tab which is here. If I move down the description on the middle, the description will be on the middle and first the additional information will be shown. But I prefer the description to be first. If you want, you can also add tabs like this custom tab. In the custom tab in here, there are so many options. You can write text, add any description as well. Okay, but I'm going to delete it. I don't know. I we don't need any additional tabs here. Now, this is related products. In the related products, you can decide how many columns you want to uh show. I'm going to select as three. And total products. I'm going to show three products total. Then you can go to the recently viewed products. I'm going to turn on display. If you have any products you recently viewed, it will be displayed here. Recently viewed products. And total products, I'm going to show three. Then finally, we have add to cart button for add to cart. This. So from here as well, we can customly design the button style like adding background color, adding color, border radius. But we already set up this so it's good. Now publish and go back from the single product. Now comes the cart page here. So our cart page is currently missing from here. So we can add a product to cart to open the cart page. Later I'm going to add a menu for the cart page right here. So currently the cart page is looking like this but you can change the layout to this. And this is also a good looking layout. Let's compare both. This is looking like this. And this is looking like this. Almost similar, but I think the first one is looking better. Okay. So, let's keep it this. Now, go back. And finally, you have the mini cart. The mini cart is this. Let's go to the shop. Add a product to the cart. So, mini cart comes up when you click on add to cart. So this is the mini card. We can barely see it right now, but you can go to general and change the empty card message, which is currently no products in the cart. You can change it if you want. So that's that. Now let's go back. Let's go back from the oocommerce. We're done with this. Now we can go to the menus to create menus for our footer. Right? So currently we have already the main menu we have created from the dashboard. If you want, you can create the footer menu from the dashboard, but I'm going to show you how to create the menus right from here. So, click create new menu. From here, I'm going to name it footer menu one. And click on next. And in the footer menu one, let's add items. So, first I'm going to add homepage, contact page, and shop page. So, this is footer menu one. From here, let's add one more menu. Go back from the menu one. Click on create new menu. This one will be footer menu 2. Click on next. Add items. In here, we'll add maybe the my account page, then wish list, then cart page, and the dashboard. Okay. So, I have created two footer menus. Now from the main menu I want to edit this a little bit. Let's add an item. From here I want to add card button. So by clicking on the card it shows the mini cart or go to the cart page. Okay. Now publish. Go back from the main menu. Go back from here. And now we're going to go to the widgets. In the widgets there are so many options. So first in the commerce sidebar. This is the oocommerce sidebar. Okay. So in here we can add items. Let's click on block and from here I'm going to search search and you'll see this product search option. Click on here and this product search will be added and it will look like this in here. Then click on plus again this time search filter and you'll see the product filters addit and it will be looking like this. We'll customize it nicely. Then after that click on plus again and this time search price category and you'll see this categories list addit and it'll be added here. Now all of these looking like this really ugly but we're going to fix it really easily. Before we fix it let's publish and go back and finish our widgets. So go to the footer footer widgets. In the footer widgets, first I want to add an image. So let's click on this image and as the image I'm going to choose our own logo image. So this now click on the plus and add paragraph. Add the paragraph right here. Then after that you'll find social icons. You'll see this. Add this. So from here add uh plus first let's search Facebook add the Facebook then add YouTube and then add X. It'll be like this. Now this time we'll add one thing that is called navigation menu. You'll see this navigation menu here. Just add it. And on the title I'm going to type links and I'm going to select the footer menu one. So the footer menu one will be selected here. Then let's add one more navigation menu. And as a title I'm going to type shops and select footer menu 2. And it will be loaded like this. Although this is looking like this. Uh we're going to fix it. Let's finish the uh adding stuff here. So from here I'm going to add one more step which will be a column. Click on this columns. Click on the first column which is 100. And within this column click on this plus and search for heading. Add this heading. I'm going to make it contact us. Then after this click on this three dots option. Then click on add after. So it will add content right after this within this column and click here and search for list. You'll find this one list. Then in here add a number. Then I'm going to click on option and duplicate. Then duplicate one more time. Then on the second one I'm going to add an email address. Then finally an address like this. So here this will be looking like this. Okay. Now we're done adding the items. Now we're going to fix this thing. It should be looking like this. Right? First the logo on the same column the paragraph and on the same column some social icons. So from here I'm actually going to delete this. From here scroll down delete. From here select the paragraph delete. And select this one and delete. Oops. Select the whole thing and delete. Okay. Now click on here on the navigation menu. Click on the options and click on add before. So uh block will be added before this thing. Okay. So in here click on the plus and this time select column and select the 100% column. Then click on the plus in the column and this time add image. Now again let's uh media library. Let's select the logo we have after the logo. Select the logo like this. Click on the uh three dots. Then click on add after. Then add the paragraph. Click on the blog. Search for paragraph and add the paragraph here like this. Then select the paragraph. Click on three dots and click add. after click on the plus then click on social icons and click on this plus here and as a social icon I'm going to add Facebook then add X then add YouTube and we can add one more like LinkedIn so the icons are looking like this but within the icon we can click on the icons and add the real social links but for now I'm going to put hash so it enables the icon. So just click on the icon and put hash if you don't have the link ready yet. Just putting the hash so it is showing in the footer, right? So click on the LinkedIn lastly put the hash and it will be showing here. Now I want to change the style of the social icons. I want to make it exactly like this. For that select this whole social icon widget and from the three dots select show more settings and you will see all of these. From here click on this option style and select the logos only. Now the social icon will be looking like this. And from the icon color you can choose this color and the icon will have this black color in the footer. looking really nice now. Now our footer is looking ready. As you can see, everything is in a column and we have all together four columns. This is also fully responsive in the tablet mode and mobile mode. Perfect. So our footer is actually ready. So we can go back from our footer widgets. And we already did set up the WooCommerce sidebar which is looking like this right now. But now I'm going to add some custom CSS to make it look perfect and the products will look perfect too. So from the additional CSS open it and in the field we can actually add custom CSS we have added before in our homepage. So to get the CSS code, just go to jinfjutoal.com. And here you'll find the default entire page style CSS. First, copy it and paste the CSS code here. After adding it, go back there again and scroll down and copy this product card style CSS. Then in here, add some space and paste it too. And you'll see the products will be colored like this. This is looking really good. Now, now we have some more style CSS to fix these right here. So, go back and you'll have shop page filter CSS style. Copy this one and paste the CSS code in here. Then go back again. Select this single product page style CSS. add the CSS code in here. It'll fix some things in the single shop. Then this is product card style CSS classes. We don't need it. And finally, we have the blog post style CSS. This is for just for homepage, so we'll add it later. And we'll want to copy this one. Blog page style CSS. Add it. And if we now go to the blocks page, some extra things are gone from here after adding the CSS. But you see the sidebar here. We'll fix the sidebar later here from the widgets. Okay. Now we have the single blog post style CSS. Copy this and add the code here. And if we open the single style CSS, I mean single blog post. It's fixed. The text are fixed. Text sizes are fixed. So, we're good here. Now, we'll actually fix the blogs sidebar. Okay, these. So, go back from the customization and go to the widgets and you'll see the main sidebar which is actually referring to this. So, we can add widgets like search. Add this search and the search will be added here. Then we can add widgets like categories. Select categories list and it'll show all the blocks categories list. Then if you want you can search tags. Actually there's no tags. And you can add any widget you want in the blocks page. Okay. I'm just going to keep it as it is for now. So go back. Now I'm going to actually go ahead and fix the shop page. So we need to go back to this widgets again and open the oocommerce sidebar and in here we have to select this uh search option. Then click on this three dots and click on show more settings. And we'll have so so many settings here. First of all click on use button with icon and the search uh we'll use only the icon not the text. Okay just like in here. Then go to the styles and we have the color first text. Click on here. Select the white color. So the icon color will be white. Then icon background. I'm going to select this accent one. And it will be looking like this. And also we have the font size. Instead of the default, let's make a custom one. Click on here. Set custom. Make it 16 pixel. It'll be a little bit bigger. And once we close the side panel, it'll be looking like this. Okay. And the rest is good for the search button or search widget. So let's go back and next we have to delete this filter. This filter text is looking bad here. This is unnecessary. So just remove the text like this. Okay. Now let's select the price filter here. Scroll down. This is this. Now click on here three dot. Click on show more settings. Actually select this this whole thing. Now click on show more settings and first uh turn off this show input fields. So it'll remove the fields and show only the numbers. Then let's go to the style and make all the color this uh orange color. So every slider and knob color will be this accent color looking nice and the search text is looking bad here. We can go back, delete this search text. We don't want the label because it's already saying search products in here. We don't want to add any label. Okay. So everything is looking perfect now. The sidebar is perfect for the shop. Now we can click on publish. And if we close it, close the whole customization uh sidebar. Now our whole website is looking like this. This is our homepage. This is already perfect. But we can see the blogs here are looking really bad. We have to fix it. So we can click on edit with Elementor. And we need to add this code which is blog post tile CSS for homepage. We have to copy this code and in the homepages custom CSS code here inside the style tag we can add this like this and then we have to go back here and we have this blog post style CSS class we have to copy this one blog post and go back and select this blog blog post in here we have to add the CSS class name inside CSS classes if we add it it will be perfectly fixed with same height. Perfect. Now publish. Now let's go back to our front end website. Just type our domain name to go to the home. Now let's go to the shop. How it's looking? This is looking like this. Super perfect. Now if we go to a in a single website or single product. Okay. So even after adding some custom CSS in the customization, we can see in our single shop page, this part is still conflicted the design. But we can fix it really easily. We can uh put this wish list button or this her button right here. For that we have to go to the dashboard. From here you'll find this AMC wish list. Click on here. And if you uh see the guided setup just skip all of them and you'll be here. Then from here under the style click on this wish list style button style and scroll down you'll see this add to wishlist button on single product page which is this page and this button. So currently this is on the left side the button position on the top left side but instead of this I'm going to select on image top right side. Okay, after selecting, click on save settings. Then go back to the single product and refresh. And you'll see the button will be here. Perfect. Now, one more thing in the page. I want to change this gray color from the product. I want it to be fully white color like this. So, for that, it's really easy. Click on the customization again and click on the oocommerce. Open the single uh product single. Then open the general. If you scroll down, you'll find this content background. Click on this color and select fully white color. The code will be 6F. Now this will be looking even better. Close the customization. Now the page is looking much much better. So everything is looking perfect in the uh product single. Now let's go to the blogs. So the blog list are looking like this which I actually don't like at all. So I rather make it like the homepage. In the homepage blogs are looking really good. So from the customize let's quickly fix it. Now from the layout go to the blog and make the blog layout this this grid one. It will be grid but the sidebar is messing up. So actually I don't want the sidebar. So from uh here go back open the sidebar and on the blog list instead of right sidebar I'm going to select no sidebar and for the blog single as well I'm going to select no sidebar and it will be looking like this looking actually much much better than before. If we open the single blog post the sidebar will be gone too and we can enjoy the full blog in the full screen like this. Perfect. Now let's publish and close. So the blogs is perfect. Now we can go to the wish list. We're actually polishing the whole website. We are checking the whole website and pages to polish it. So wish list looks so much polished. Good enough. It's already polished. Nothing to do. So then let's go to the contact. So the contact page is perfect on in terms of design but it doesn't have the full width. It's not having the full width for the page. So we can fix it really really easily. Just open the element. Open the page with the element. Now from here click on the page settings. Scroll down and instead of page layout default make it element full width and the contact page will have its full width. Perfect. Now publish. and go back. So the contact page is fully perfect. Now we can go to the cart page. So the cart page is having a default card style, right? But I want to make the card style look like this in my targeted website like this. Okay. So we can go to the dashboard and do it. Go to the dashboards pages. and open the cart page. And in the cart, we can see there's a default uh cart widget which are holding all of these default stuff. So, we can select all of them like this. And from here, just delete everything. Now, we have to add a short code. Click on here and search for short code. You'll see this. And we need to add the short code here. To find the short code, it's really easy. Just Google Woo Commerce short codes. Search this. Just scroll down. You'll find this short codes included with WooCommerce documentation. Just open this. Scroll down. Scroll down. And you'll find this WooCommerce short codes. You'll see the whole list. So first we need we need this first one displays the card. So this is the simple short code. We have to copy and paste it inside this cart pages short code. After adding click save. And now if we go to our uh cart page and refresh this will be looking like this. How nice it's looking our now it's looking like our website. This is using our global fonts, global font styles, text colors all of them. So this is looking like our theme color. Okay. Now similarly we can fix the checkout page. Click on the proceed to check out to see it. This is by default. By default the checkout page looks like this. So we can go back from here. And in the pages we can open the checkout page. And we can see the default checkout widget which we can select like this and delete instead click on here and search short code. Oops. And we can get the short code right from here. Uh the second one says displays the checkout page. Copy this short code and add it here. Click on save. And now we if we refresh the checkout page, this is looking like this. Super amazing. Definitely better than before. Way better. Okay. So our check out page is perfect. Now if you want you can also open the my account page and if you see there is already short code then it's okay. If you don't see the short code add the short code widget and copy this WooCommerce my account short code. Add it here. It'll be perfect. Okay. So, this is our whole website overall. It's looking like this. Just perfect. By the way, on the search, we can search for the product here. Just search anything and the products will be shown up here. It's everything is automatically done. You don't have to write any codes or make anything functional manually. Everything will work like a butter. So this is our website. This is looking like this. Fully customized and super perfect. So today if you have learned something new from this video, make sure hit that like button, subscribe to our channel, and share this video with everyone on social media. It would mean world to me. I'll catch you on the next amazing tutorial. For now, bye-bye.
Download Subtitles
These subtitles were extracted using the Free YouTube Subtitle Downloader by LunaNotes.
Download more subtitlesRelated Videos
Download Subtitles for WooCommerce SEO Tutorial with Yoast Plugin
Enhance your learning by downloading accurate subtitles for our WooCommerce SEO optimization tutorial using the Yoast free WordPress plugin. Easily follow along and grasp every step to improve your product listings and boost online visibility.
Download Subtitles for How I Started My Small Business Video
Enhance your learning experience by downloading accurate subtitles for the 'How I Started My Small Business' video. Captions help you follow along easily, catch every tip for shipping and selling online, and ensure you don't miss any important insights. Perfect for visual learners and non-native speakers alike.
Download Accurate Subtitles and Captions for Your Videos
Easily download high-quality subtitles to enhance your video viewing experience. Subtitles improve comprehension, accessibility, and engagement for diverse audiences. Get captions quickly for better understanding and enjoyment of any video content.
Download Subtitles and Captions for Any Video Easily
Enhance your viewing experience by downloading accurate subtitles and captions for any video. Improve comprehension, accessibility, and enjoy content in multiple languages effortlessly with our easy-to-use subtitle downloader.
Download Subtitles for The 2025 Guide to Rendering in Unreal Engine 5
Enhance your learning experience with downloadable subtitles for The 2025 Guide to Rendering in Unreal Engine 5 video. Accurate captions make it easier to follow complex rendering techniques and ensure accessibility for all viewers. Get your subtitles now to master Unreal Engine 5 effectively.
Most Viewed
Download Subtitles for 2025 Arknights Ambience Synesthesia Video
Enhance your viewing experience of the 2025 Arknights Ambience Synesthesia — Echoes of the Legends by downloading accurate subtitles. Perfect for understanding the intricate soundscapes and lore, these captions ensure you never miss a detail.
Download Subtitles for Girl Teases Friend Funny Video
Enhance your viewing experience by downloading subtitles for the hilarious video 'Girl Teases Friend For Having Poor BF'. Captions help you catch every witty remark and enjoy the humor even in noisy environments or for non-native speakers.
تحميل ترجمات فيديو الترانزستورات كيف تعمل؟
قم بتنزيل ترجمات دقيقة لفيديو الترانزستورات لتسهيل فهم كيفية عملها. تعزز الترجمات تجربة التعلم الخاصة بك وتجعل المحتوى متاحًا لجميع المشاهدين.
離婚しましたの動画字幕|無料で日本語字幕ダウンロード
「離婚しました」の動画字幕を無料でダウンロードできます。視聴者が内容をより深く理解し、聴覚に障害がある方や外国人にも便利な字幕付き動画を楽しめます。
Download Accurate Subtitles and Captions for Your Videos
Easily download high-quality subtitles to enhance your video viewing experience. Subtitles improve comprehension, accessibility, and engagement for diverse audiences. Get captions quickly for better understanding and enjoyment of any video content.

